JP2020116094A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: control means (game control device) for controlling a game; and a special variable winning device capable of being converted from a closed state in which a game ball may not enter to an open state in which a game ball may enter. The control means can convert the special variable winning device into an open state according to a prescribed open time in each of a plurality of rounds in a special game state, and notify an open time according to an open state of the special variable winning device, scheduled after a prescribed notification condition is established in response to the establishment of the prescribed notification condition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 114

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area based on the fact that the game ball is won in the start opening provided in the game area (start prize) ) Is executed in a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened is set. In addition, it is also proposed that the special variation winning device in the special game state is provided with a plurality of types according to the special result (for example, Patent Document 1).
reference).

JP, 2014-104204, A

However, the interest in the special gaming state cannot be sufficiently improved only by changing the opening mode of the special variation winning device according to the special result. An object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
A game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Control means for controlling the game,
And a special variation winning device capable of converting the closed state where the game ball cannot win to the open state where the game ball can win,
The control means is
It is possible to convert the special variation winning device to the open state according to a predetermined opening time for each of a plurality of rounds in the special game state,
In response to the establishment of the predetermined notification condition, it is possible to notify the opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device scheduled after the notification condition is established.

According to the present invention, amusement of a game can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a 1st special variation winning device. It is a figure explaining the structure of a batch display device. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a figure explaining the transition of a game state. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining checksum calculation processing. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number updating process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 1. 9 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 2. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining V abnormal passage monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining ball monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining discharge ball monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining the winning number counter update processing. It is the flowchart which explains production command setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number. It is a figure explaining the example in which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation alerting|reporting is performed. It is the flowchart which explains the game machine state check processing. It is a flow chart explaining pay-out busy signal check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure starting opening 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure starting opening 2 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 2 normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart explaining 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a high probability variation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 transition process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 2 process transition setting process during a change. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a change in special figure 1. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 process during a change. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process shift setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transfer setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 1 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart explaining fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 small hit fanfare inside process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 small hit fanfare inside process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare/during-interval processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing 1 during a special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining processing during opening of the special winning opening. It is a flow chart explaining big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart explaining small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol variation control process. It is a flow chart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining magnet irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting port 1 signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining a symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining probability change operation field switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining lever solenoid control processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variation production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining single-shot system command processing. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display. It is a flow chart explaining big hit type command processing. It is a figure explaining the (a) count production|generation setting process, and the (b) notification time table. It is a figure explaining an example of the notification of the openable time. It is a figure explaining an example of the notification of the openable time. It is a figure explaining another example of the notification of the openable time. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion of the degree of expectation in reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion of the degree of expectation in reach production. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state in the 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining the falling lottery processing in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining another example of transition of the game state in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the prefetching effect in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state in the 3rd modification.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is assembled to the support frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is a front frame 1
It is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of 2. Also, the front frame (body frame) 1
2, a glass frame 15 (including a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 (
A transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED and the like are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification color of the lamp or the LED (for example, red). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b are used to notify the content of the abnormality by voice. A lamp for paying out anomaly may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown)
Reservoir plate), the upper bowl ball outlet 22 from which the gaming balls dispensed from the dispensing unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and the gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper dish 21 is full. A lower tray (reception tray) 23 for storing and an operation unit 24 of the ball-striking launcher are provided. Furthermore, the plate 21
At the upper edge portion of the effect button switch 25a for receiving the pressing operation input from the player
An effect button 25 with a built-in is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided.
Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

In addition, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an eject button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24 to cause the ball-striking launcher to supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming board 30.
Fire toward the game area 32 on the front. Further, by the player operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2 ), the effect of the player's operation intervening, etc. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of four corners of the game board 30.
3 and the guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed in the substantially center. Display device 41
Is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game balls from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) and information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed. Further, the left and right parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces an effect by operating.
The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning openings 3
5 are arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are the winning opening switches 35a (see FIG. 11).
Detected by.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first starting winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 11). Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a second starting winning opening 37 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 37 is a starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 11).
).

Below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the first start winning opening 36, a first special that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A variable winning device (upper prize opening) 38 is provided.

The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by pivoting in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the upper special winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variation winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper special winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening/closing door 38c driven by an upper special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 11) as a drive device, and a big hit or a small hit. During the special game state based on the above, by converting the upper special winning opening from the closed state to the open state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the upper special winning opening, and to give the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is added. Inside the upper special winning opening (winning area), a upper special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 11) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper special winning opening. There is.

FIG. 3 shows the flow paths of the game balls in the first special variation winning device 38. Inside the first special variation winning device 38 (winning area), there is provided an upper special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special variation winning device 38. ing. All the game balls that have entered the first special variation winning device 38 are detected through the upper special winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper flow path 38j.

The upper flow path 38j is provided with a probability variation operating region 38h into which a game ball can flow, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 11) is used to change the probability of the game ball inflowing into the probability variation operating region 38h. A lever member 38i that operates is provided. The lever member is a plate-shaped member that is slidable in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 3, the lever member protrudes forward to cover the probability variation operating region 38h, and the game ball cannot flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. Then, it can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. That is, the probability variation operating region 38h can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win and an open state in which the game ball can win, and forms a specific region into which the game ball can flow, and the lever member 38i. However, it forms an inflow regulation member that can be converted into a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific region (probability change operating region 38h) and a state in which the game ball can flow into.

The probability variation operating region 38h is provided with a probability variation operating region switch 38d capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball, and the game ball flowing into the probability variation operating region 38h is detected by the probability variation operating region switch 38d and then the lower flow path 38k. Flow into. The probability state of the special figure variation display game is set to the high probability state based on the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operation area switch 38d after the special game state ends.

In addition, a passage opening switch 38g capable of detecting passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the probability variation operating region 38h in the upper flow path 38j, and the game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operating region 38h is provided. After being detected by the passage opening switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow path 38k. The lower flow path 38k is designed so that the flow path through which the game balls that have passed through the probability variation operation area 38h flow down and the flow path through which the game balls that have passed through the passage opening switch 38g flow down merge on the downstream side. And
At the downstream end of the lower flow path 38k, a discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting passage of game balls is provided, and after all the game balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, It flows into the discharge flow path that discharges the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine.

In the first special variation winning device 38 thus configured, the number of game balls detected by the upper special winning opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d and the passage opening switch 38g match. By doing so, it can be confirmed that all the game balls that have flowed into the upper flow path 38j have been discharged. Furthermore, since the number of game balls detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d and the passage opening switch 38g and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e match, all the game balls that have flowed into the lower flow path 38k. You can confirm that it has been discharged. Further, the number of game balls flowing in detected by the upper special winning opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e match, so that the game balls flowing into the first special variation winning device 38 are It can be confirmed that all have been discharged.

Returning to FIG. 2, immediately below the first starting winning opening 36, a second special variation winning device (lower major winning opening) capable of converting a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39 are provided. The second special variation winning device 39 is provided with an opening/closing door 39c that can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction in which it tilts to the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in.

The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side, and is a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the lower special winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variation winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower big winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening/closing door 39c driven by a lower large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 11) as a driving device. During the special game state based on, the lower special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the lower special winning opening, and to give the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is added.

Inside the lower special winning opening (winning region), a lower special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 11) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. .. Further, below the second special variation winning device 39, there is provided an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.

The arrangement of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. 2, the second special variation winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variation winning device 38. In this case, they may completely overlap with each other in the vertical direction, or may be shifted in the horizontal direction so that only a part thereof overlaps with the vertical direction. Further, the opening/closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and a slide type capable of opening the special winning opening by slidingly moving a plate-shaped member capable of closing the special winning opening, etc. The format is also good.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area, and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player can aim the winning at the first starting winning opening 36 by adjusting the launching force to shoot the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), and shoot the game ball to the right side game area. By hitting (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for winning in the second start winning hole 37 and the first special variable winning device 38. The second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed at by shooting the game ball to either the left or right game area.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game sphere is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is such that the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 can be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball that passes through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball that flows down in the right-side game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which form the special figure variable display game, and a variety of information are collectively displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display device (first special figure change display portion) for a special figure 1 change display game including a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1
) And special figure 2 variable display game special figure 2 indicator (second special figure variable display section) 52 (D2),
A memory display unit 54 (for informing the number of starting memory of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is composed of an LED lamp (
D11 to D14).

In addition, the collective display device 50, a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is opened and closed),
Left-handed (normal hit) or right-handed hit method that is advantageous to the player (how to hit according to the game state)
The first game state display section 77 (D8 to D10) for informing
A probability display section 78 (D15 to D18) for notifying a high probability state or a low probability state is provided. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display section that displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when the big hit occurs and notifies the big hit occurrence. A part (display) or the like may be provided. Furthermore, a general-purpose variable display game is executed like a conventional gaming machine, and a second starting winning opening is formed in which a game ball can be won based on a specific result of the universal-picture variable display game. When equipped with a variable winning system,
There is a public figure display section that displays the general figure fluctuation display game, a memory display section for informing the number of starting memory of the general figure fluctuation display game, a time saving state notification section that lights up when a time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state. It may be provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed, for example, while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, as shown in FIG. 4B, in addition to the central segment, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments. The eighth segment is also driven to blink so as to display that it is changing, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished from each other. When the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment (8th segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the out, and the result of the game is "
In the case of “win”, the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the off result mode (special result mode).

The memory display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number=holding number) among the number of winning balls into the first starting winning port 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. ) As shown in FIG.
It is displayed by turning off and turning on (flashing) the ED. The round display unit 60 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and as shown in FIG. 4D, all LEDs are turned off when not in the special game state, and selected in accordance with the special result during the special game state. The LEDs are turned on according to the number of rounds. The round display section may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4(e), the first gaming state display unit 77 turns off all LEDs when the player is in a gaming state in which the left hitting is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting (normal hitting). In a state where right-handedness is more advantageous to the player than left-handedness (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 4(e), the probability display unit 78 turns off all the LEDs when the big hit probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and the big hit probability state is a high probability state (probability change). (State), all LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 5 shows the probabilities of the big hit and the small hit, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device is a device that operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure variation display game. When the condition device works, for example, a big hit state occurs and It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set, for example, in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of being a jackpot (first special result), is common to Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2.
The probability in the normal game state which is a low probability state and the probability in the specific game state which is a high probability state are respectively shown in FIG.
The probability is as shown in (a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the big hit, the probability variation operating region 38h of the first special variation winning device 38
When the game ball flows in and is detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d (V passage), the high probability state is reached after the special game state is finished, and the special figure variation display game is played a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times). It is configured to be in a low probability state when executed. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), has a probability as shown in FIG. This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Further, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not overlapped and won. Therefore, in the high-probability state, it is sure to win either the big hit or the small hit for Toku-zu 2. It should be noted that the result may be off.

Further, FIG. 5C shows the jackpot types and the distribution probabilities that can be selected in the special diagrams 1 and 2.
(D) shows the types of small hits that can be selected in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu, the special variation winning device that is opened in each of the small hit types, the opening time, the number of times of opening, and the distribution probability. As shown in FIG. 5C, there are three types of special results in the special figure 1 variable display game: 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, and 12R normal. There are two types, 12R probability variation and 2R probability variation. The type of these special results is selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. The number of each jackpot type indicates the number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into the probability change operation area 38h and is likely to be in a high probability state (probability change state) after the special game state is ended. , The probability that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h is low, and the high probability state (
It shows that it is unlikely to be a (probably changed state). It should be noted that a special result may be provided in which the probability of the game ball flowing into the probability variation operating region 38h is lower than that of the probability variation hit, but the probability of the game ball flowing into the probability variation operating region 38h is higher than that of the normal hit.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is reached is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into the probability variation operating area 38h. Therefore, even if the jackpot type is probability variation, the probability variation operating area 3
If the game ball does not flow into 8h, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the big hit type is normal, if the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h, the high probability state occurs. Regarding 2R probability variation of special figure 2, although the number of balls is not so large, it is highly possible that a game ball will flow into the probability variation operation area 38h, and the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is again. It is set to 100 times. In the special game state based on this 2R probability variation, an effect is added such that the number of games that can be executed in a high probability state is added. Further, in the special game state based on the small hit (second special game state), the probability state is not changed depending on the presence or absence of the inflow into the probability variation operation region 38h, and the probability state when the small hit occurs is maintained. ..

FIG. 6 shows an opening mode in each round in each jackpot type. Details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. 7. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the 12R probability variation, the first round is the first
The special variable winning device 38 is opened and V is opened. The upper V opening is an opening mode in which it is highly possible that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. After the second round, the lower short opening for opening the second special variation winning device 39 is performed. As shown in FIG. 6B, in the 5R probability variation, similarly, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round, the upper V is opened, and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Open the short. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6C, in the 2R probability variation, similarly, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in the first round to open V, and the second special variation winning device 39 is opened in the second round. Open the lower short.

As shown in FIG. 6C, in the 12R normal, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and an upper short opening is performed. The upper short opening is an opening mode in which there is a lower possibility that a game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h than the upper V opening. Then, in the second and subsequent rounds, the lower long opening for opening the second special variation winning device 39 is performed. It should be noted that the game balls are allowed to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h only in the upper V opening and the upper short opening performed in the first round. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first round is the specific round, which is the round in which the game ball may flow into the probability variation operating region 38h forming the specific region.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the downward long opening, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) is reached. When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is established, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed and the round is finished (t12). Then, the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time starts (t12), and when the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time ends, the interval time starts (t1).
3) When the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the upper V is opened, the first special variation winning device 3 is started with the start of the round.
8 is opened (t31). Furthermore, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on at the start of the round.
In addition to the state, the probability variation operating area switch 38d is enabled. Lever solenoid 38
In the state where f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the probability variation operating region 38h and the game ball cannot flow in, and when the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i retreats from the probability variation operating region 38h and the game ball Is ready for inflow. The state in which the probability variation operating area switch 38d is valid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operating area switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the probability variation operating area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the probability variation operating area switch 38d detects a game ball, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 ms after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operating region switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game balls won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h.

When 200 ms has elapsed from the start of the round, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t
34). Then, after the elapse of 2700 ms, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened again (
t35), when the condition that either the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is satisfied, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round ends ( t39). After that, the interval time and the upper winning hole remaining ball processing time start (t39), and when the upper winning hole remaining ball processing time ends, the interval time starts (t
41) When the interval time ends, the next round starts (t42).

After the second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 3 is released.
8f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability variation operating area switch 38d is also effective (t36). 2 of this first special variation winning device 38
The opening of the second time is for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f also continues for a long time, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the probability variation operating region 38h.
Therefore, if the type of jackpot is probable, it will almost certainly be a high-probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept in the ON state for a predetermined time even after the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variation winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game ball to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game ball won in the first special variable winning device 38 is the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42), the operation is ended, and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed due to elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and all the game balls winning the first special variation winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time. If the discharge is not completed, and if all the discharge is completed by the end of the period (t43) in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is completed when the discharge is completed.
Turns off and the operation is terminated, and the probability variation operating area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and the gaming balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 are the upper major winning hole remaining ball processing time. If not all are discharged by the end (t43) of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43). Then, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off to end the operation. In this case, after 100 ms have passed since the lever solenoid 38f was turned off (t43), the probability variation operating region switch 38d becomes invalid (t44).
..

As shown in FIG. 7C, in the upper short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variation winning device 38 in the upper V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and based on the completion of the opening. The round is finished (t54). The opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is for a very short time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time.
It is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the type of jackpot is normal.

It should be noted that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid/invalid switching of the probability variation operation area switch perform the same operation as in the case of opening the upper V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 (t55). ~t63). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 even after the upper winning hole remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state at the time when the discharging of the remaining ball is completed. Then, the operation ends and the probability variation operating area switch 38d becomes invalid. Further, if all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF at the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). And the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62), 10
When 0 ms has elapsed, the probability variation operating area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7B, the first opening of the first special variation winning device 38 in the upper V opening (
t31 to t34) and the opening of the first special variation winning device 38 (t51 to t54) in the upper short opening shown in FIG. The opening time should be such that a prize can be won.

As shown in FIG. 7D, in the lower short opening, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened with the start of the round (t71), and the openable time of 1808 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) is reached. When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed and the round is finished (t72). However, because the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of winnings, which are the closing conditions, are generated, and in most cases the prize is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time starts (t72), the interval time starts when the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t73), and the next round starts when the interval time ends (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

The lower short opening is almost the same as the opening of the special variation winning device based on the small hit 2. As a result, it is possible to give an impression as if a small hit frequently occurs. It should be noted that the openable time based on the small hit is 1792 ms, and the openable time in the lower short open of the big hit is 1808 ms, but the difference between them is 16 ms, and the player must determine the difference in the openable time. Has become difficult. Although the difference in the openable time may be more than this, it is preferable that the difference is such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two. Of course, both may be opened at the same time.

FIG. 8 shows the transition of the game state. The gaming state includes a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST3. Incidentally, there are other special game states, but they are omitted here. In each gaming state, the winning probability that a special result to be controlled by the gaming control device 100 is derived, a production mode which is controlled by the production control device 300 to determine the production mode of the game, and should be mainly aimed at in the gaming state. A main starting area which is a starting area, a main variation special figure which is a type of special figure variation display game to be executed mainly, and a shooting direction of a game ball are defined.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening 36 is made by left-handing.
It is possible to aim for a prize in the second starting prize hole 37 by hitting the right side. That is, it is possible to select either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed according to the intention of the player. Further, in each gaming state, it is designed assuming that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game mainly proceeds with the game, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured such that it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game mainly in the one special figure variation display game which is determined to be the main one in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

The normal gaming state ST1 is a state in which the winning probability is a low probability state, and is not a time saving state (no time saving) for reducing the variation time of the special figure variation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the normal mode. Further, since the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. As will be described later, in the normal game state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game.
As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, and the normal game state ST
The player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to win the small hit in 1.

The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the winning probability is a high probability state and a time saving state (with time saving) for reducing the variation time of the special figure variation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode. Further, since the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 37, and the firing direction is right-handed to aim at the second starting winning opening 37. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed as a main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed as an irregular variation. This first specific game state ST2
Then, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes shorter than that in the normal gaming state ST1, and a person who plays the special figure 2 variable display game by hitting right and aiming at the second start winning opening 37 Will be advantageous to the player. There is only either a big hit or a small hit in the result of the special display 2 variable display game, and since the probability of winning the small hit is higher than the big hit, the small hit occurs frequently in the first specific game state ST2. Then, the player's possession ball increases. Since the small hits occur at a high frequency in this way, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

The second specific game state ST3 is a state in which the winning probability is high and is not a time saving state (no time saving) for reducing the variation time of the special figure variation display game. The production mode that defines the production mode is the High mode. Further, since the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. The execution mode such as the variation time of the special figure variation display game is the same as that of the normal gaming state ST1, except that the probability state is a high probability state.

In addition, the normal mode, which is the effect mode in each of the above-mentioned game states, the small hit RUSH mode, H
Since the high modes have different effect modes, it is possible for the player to know which game state the player is in. Also, in addition to making it possible to grasp the game state by the production mode,
The firing direction of the game ball is informed so that the player can grasp the firing direction and the main variation special map. In particular, in the High mode, a probability change notification display that allows the player to clearly know that the player is in a high probability state may be displayed so that the player does not stop playing.

Of these three game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. Since the second specific game state ST3 is a high probability state, it is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1, and the first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state and a time saving state. 2 This is a more advantageous state for the player than the specific game state ST3.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the special game state based on the derivation of the special result or exhausting the specified number of games. Basically, when the special result is derived and becomes the special game state, and the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the special game state and is detected by the probability variation operating region switch 38d. (V passing) shifts to the first specific game state ST2 after the end of the special game state. In addition, when the special result is derived and becomes the special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the probability variation operation region 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the special game state (no V passage), the special game state. After the end of normal game state ST1
Becomes Also, in a high probability state such as the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, when the specified number of games (here, 100 times) is executed after the special game state ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1. To do.

As an exception to the transition of the game state, in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game which is not the main variable special figure, and the special game state is set. The case where the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 and is detected by the probability variation operating region switch 38d (V passing) can be mentioned.
In this case, after the end of the special game state, not the first specific game state ST2 but the second specific game state ST3. That is, when the special figure variable display game result is a special result, the game value given to the player is changed depending on whether or not the special figure variable display game is the main special figure variable display game. Will be. Here, the game value of whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is set to the time saving state is different.

It should be noted that here, regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, the game value given to the player is changed depending on whether or not the special figure variable display game is the main special figure variable display game.
Similarly in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game value given to the player may be different depending on whether or not the special figure variable display game is the main special figure variable display game. Further, although the game value to be changed is determined to have the time saving state, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of rounds in the special game state and the opening mode of the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 may be different. Also, the ease with which the game balls flow into the probability variation operating region 38h may be different. Further, the number of games to be in the time saving state may be different. In addition to this, whether or not to execute a specific video or sound may be different as the game value in the production. Further, a combination of these may be used.

In addition, in the special game state, after the special game state is finished, an effect of notifying which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state the game is to move to may be performed. By performing such an effect, it is possible to notify in advance the launch direction of the game ball after the end of the special game state. The performance execution timing may be any timing during the special game state, for example, during a particular round or ending.

In addition, as the effect, there is an effect in which the first specific game state and the second specific game state are shown as candidates for the game state to be transferred, and one of these is selected by a roulette wheel or the like. In this way, by creating an effect that makes it seem as if the game state to be transitioned by lottery has been set, transition to an unfavorable game state by deriving a special result in a special figure variation display game that is not the main variation special figure It is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and discouragement. Especially for a player who does not know that the game state to be transferred differs depending on whether or not it is a main fluctuation special map,
In the special game state, even though the game ball has flown into the probability variation operating region 38h of the first special variation winning device 38, the game state shifts to a more disadvantageous state than expected, so that the player feels discomfort or disappointment. However, by performing an effect such as performing a lottery, it is possible to make the player think that the game state has transitioned to an unfavorable gaming state due to deviation from the lottery, and a feeling of discomfort or disappointment can be reduced.

In addition, within a predetermined period or within a predetermined number of games immediately after the main fluctuation special map is switched, even if the firing direction is switched, the game ball that has already been launched wins the starting winning opening that is not in the main starting area. It is possible that a special figure variation display game that is not a main variation special figure is executed and a special result is obtained in the special figure variation display game. When the special result is derived in, it is possible that the player does not recognize that the special result was derived in the special figure variation display game that is not the main variation special figure. It is particularly effective to execute the effect that is performed.

9 and 10 show the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 9A shows a variation pattern when the result is out of the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3. As described above, in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, so that the player advances the game mainly in the special figure 1 variation display game, With regard to Toku-zu 2, regardless of which fluctuation pattern is selected, the long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. The time for long fluctuation is set to about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

That is, in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game. Is becoming The probability of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game is higher than that of the special figure 1 variable display game, but if the variation time is long in the case of an outlier result or in the case of a small hit described later, the normal gaming state ST1 and In the second specific game state ST3, execution of the special figure 2 variable display game is made inefficient in time, and in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the special figure 1 variable display game is given to the player. I mainly try to advance the game. Then, as described above, the special figure 1 variable display game is prevented from shifting to the first specific game state ST2 even if the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. It is more disadvantageous than that, and the game is mainly advanced to the player in the special figure 1 variable display game.

FIG. 9B shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is out of alignment in the first specific game state ST2. It should be noted that no variation pattern is set for the special figure 2 variable display game because the result of the lottery may not be missed. Also, for the special figure 1 variable display game, only one variation pattern is selectable. In this first specific game state ST2, the above-mentioned normal game state ST1
And contrary to the case of the second specific game state ST3, the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation,
Special Figure 1 The variable display game is designed to have irregular fluctuations.

Here, in the special figure 1 variable display game in which the irregular variation occurs in the first specific game state ST2, the variation time in the case of a deviation result is the irregular variation in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3. Fig. 2 The fluctuation time (Fig. 9 (
It is set shorter than that in (a). This is the first specific game state ST2 as described later.
A short time is set as the variation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit, and further, in the first specific game state ST2, the result of the lottery for the special figure 2 variable display game is off. This is because there is no

That is, in the first specific game state ST2 in which the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and can be executed efficiently in time, the special figure 1 variable display game having the deviation result as the result of the lottery is apparent. This is disadvantageous, and it is possible to allow the player to mainly play the special figure 2 variable display game without setting such a long variable time. Therefore, it is not necessary to set a fluctuation time longer than necessary as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, but when it is executed simultaneously with the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly used. In order to allow the game to proceed, the variation time is sufficiently longer than the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is forcibly stopped by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3. With regard to Toku-zu 2, only fluctuation patterns that do not cause the reach state can be selected. In the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, the variation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is more than the selectable variation time when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit. It may be a long fluctuation time. Further, as described above, even if the result is a big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3 and the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h, the second specific game state ST3 is set. This prevents the player from becoming too advantageous in the event of a big hit due to irregular fluctuations, and encourages execution of the main variation, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the first specific game state ST2. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected. In particular, for the special figure 1 variable display game, the second shortest variation time is selected when comparing the variation time that can be selected when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. ing. As a result, even in the first specific game state ST2, the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game with irregular fluctuation will be stopped before the special figure 2 variable display game with main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display will be increased. We try to reduce the chances that the big hit of the game will be forcibly changed to the result. In addition, although the distribution of the variation pattern in FIG. 2 is performed by the type of jackpot described above, it may be determined by a random number or the like.

FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3. With regard to Toku-zu 2, a long variation is selected in which a reach state is not generated and a variation time of about 10 minutes is set. In FIG. 10D, the first
A variation pattern is shown when the result is a small hit in the specific game state ST2. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected. The special display 1 variable display game is set to the same time as in the case of the deviation in the first specific game state ST2, but this is also forced by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game as in the case of the deviation. It has been enough time to be stopped. In the first specific game state ST2, the variation time when the special figure 1 variable display game falls off or a small hit is sufficient to be forcibly stopped by the large figure or small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. In that case, it may be shorter than the time shown here.

From the above, the special results include the first special result (big hit) capable of generating the first special game state, and the second special game having a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate a state is included.

By doing as described above, it is possible to perform the game in accordance with the design of the gaming machine. That is, when the action of intentionally aiming at the special figure 2 variable display game in which the probability of a small hit is higher than in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the game machine is designed. The profit that can be given to the player, which is assumed in, will be greatly exceeded. However, by setting the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, and by setting the game state to be shifted when the special figure 2 variable display game is not the main variation special figure, a big state, as described above, (2) It is possible to prevent an intentional action when the variable display game is not the main variable special map.
In addition, by making it possible to differ the game value to be given depending on whether or not it is a main variation special map in this way, the degree of freedom in designing the game machine such as the jackpot probability, type, and number of times saved can be increased, It becomes possible to develop a wider variety of gaming machines.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. Also,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished from each other, they are simply called a hit (special result). Further, when the first special game state, which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
A game is performed by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37
, The first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, or the game area 32
It flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, the type of the winning opening won. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 11) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided inside, and a predetermined upper limit number (
For example, 4) is stored. Toku-zu 1 The variable display game can be started, and
When a game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 36 with the first starting memory number being 0, the first starting memory is stored along with the generation of the starting right, and the first starting memory number is incremented by one. At the same time, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately started based on the first starting memory, and at this time, the first starting memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state where the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, a state where the special figure 1 variable display game has already been executed and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or a special game state When the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 36, if the first starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first starting memory number is incremented by 1 and one first starting memory is stored. .. Then, in a state where the first starting memory number is 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (end of the previous special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state). The starting memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first starting memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. When the second start winning opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. In addition, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be immediately started, for example, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game has already been executed and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or a special game state In addition, the second starting memory does not occur even if the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 37. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 37, the second starting memory is temporarily generated for the sake of processing, but the second starting memory is The second starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur because it is immediately consumed.

In addition, when the start winning prize ball is detected, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random number values are in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 11). Is stored in the special figure storage area (part of RAM) as a special figure starting memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, for the first starting memory, a maximum of four times). The memory number of the special figure starting memory is stored in the memory display unit 54 for notifying the starting winning number of the collective display device 50 (special figure 1
In addition to being displayed on the hold indicator, it is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure starting memory display.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variable display device) based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory, and the second starting. Winning mouth 3
Based on the winning of 7, a special figure 2 variable display game is played on the special figure 2 display device 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time. However, while one of the special figure variable display games is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). When it becomes, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result (outcome result) other than the special result.

The special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 perform the variable display in the display mode as shown in FIG. 4B, and then stop the predetermined result mode. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special result mode (the small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special map 2 display device 52 corresponds to the second special result. It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the second based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 37.
It constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game).

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed on the display device (image display device) 41. The decorative special figure variable display game is executed. The decoration special figure variable display game includes a decoration special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decoration special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, which are separately provided. Is displayed in the display area of. Then, the variable display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display variation display game in which the display device 41 variably displays the ornament identification information corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) ( It is a decorative variable display means capable of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. In addition, game machine 1
The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in 0, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It comprises a CPU section 110 which has, an input section 120 which has an input port, an output section 130 which has an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 which connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like. ..

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (called amusement chip (IC))
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, D generated by the power supply device 400 are provided in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as C5V is supplied to enable the operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC- that generates the DC voltage of DC 32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter for generating a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 are supplied with a power supply voltage at the time of power failure. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And, it has a power failure monitoring circuit, and is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 which generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal which inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
1 (in particular, the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, the game state is advantageous for the player (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same Status that has become identification information,
However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving the special result mode is different (expected value is different), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It has become higher in order of premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random pattern generation to generate random pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variable display game execution time in variable display without reach, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A executes the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result (big hit, small hit or out) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, Any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories. Here, CPU111A
Is a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit to drive a payout ball according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111. Then, an interface chip (a high-level signal of 11V and a low-level signal of 7V, which is supplied from these switches, which has a negative logic is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V (
Proximity I/F) 121a and 121b are provided. The proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b are
When the input range is set to 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and becomes abnormal. It is configured to be able to detect various states and output an abnormality detection signal.

In the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a in the universal figure starting gate 34,
Inside the general winning opening 35, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper special winning opening switch 38a in the first special variation winning apparatus 38, the lower special winning opening switch 39a in the second special variation winning apparatus 39, and the first special variation winning apparatus 38. Probability variation operation area switch 38d provided in the probability variation operation area 38h, start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, start opening 2 switch 37 in the second start winning opening 37
a, a passage opening switch 38g that detects a game ball that has not flown into the probability variation operation area 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, and a discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects a game ball discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 A board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine is connected.

The outputs of the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b are the second input port 123 and the third input port 12
4 and is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs from the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switch 35 are included.
a, upper special winning opening switch 38a, lower special winning opening switch 39a, probability changing operation area switch 38
The detection signals of d, the start port 1 switch 36a, and the start port 2 switch 37a are the second input port 12
Input to 3.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the passage opening switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, the board radio wave sensor 62 and abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like.
Detection signal and the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like.
Of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided in the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like. Further, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a detection of a radio wave by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (the payout control device 200 can receive a command) Signal indicating whether or not it is in this state is also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Of the outputs from the proximity I/Fs 121 a and 121 b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the passage port switch 38 g out of the outputs to the third input port 124 are the main board 100.
Is also supplied to the test-firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. ..

As described above, the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. It is like this.

The data held by the second input port 123 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which receives a signal based on the above) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is input to the ports 122, 123,
Not supplied to 124. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is set so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The proximity I/F 121a, 12
A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from 1b, is supplied to the test-injection test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the test is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-shooting test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-injection test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open an upper special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, a lower special winning opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and the first. A second output port 134 for outputting operation data of a lever solenoid 38f that operates a lever member 38i in the special variation winning device 38 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b, the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b, and the lever solenoid 38f output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. 1 driver (drive circuit) 138a, 2nd driver 138b which outputs the ON/OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 which is output from the 3rd output port 135, and is output from the 4th output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal of a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to is provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, and therefore the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs that are sequentially selected by, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, the lower special winning opening switch 39a, the probability variation operating area switch 38d, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the passage opening switch 38g in the first special variation winning device 38 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes is used.
Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a, 19b
Equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) As. Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
Operates at 5V DC, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3V DC, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) board production device 44 (for example, display device 41)
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory etc. that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in FIG. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. In addition, even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect production), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. good.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. For detecting the ON/OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch), and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311;
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the configuration as described above.
A DC voltage of 32V for driving a motor or a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor or an LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the same or the like. DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating or DC1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

In these control circuits, the starting opening 1 switch 36 provided in the first starting winning opening 36
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from a, the random number for jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted, and the first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The big hit determination random number value or the like in the first starting memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and processing for determining the hitting or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the second starting winning opening 37, the random number for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game and the like are extracted and stored in the RAM 111C. Remember the starting memory. The random numbers for jackpot determination in the second starting memory are compared with the determination values stored in the ROM 111B,
Toku-zu 2 The process of determining the hit or the change pattern of the change display game is performed. The second starting memory can be generated only when the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game. The start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 sends a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game described above to the effect control device 30.
Output to 0. And, the special design 1 indicator 51 and the special design 2 indicator 52, the identification design (identification information)
Is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then a process of displaying the special figure variability display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37). Make a means.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game.
Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of the effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and at the same time the special game. Perform processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111A enables the opening and closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 to be opened by the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game balls to flow into the upper special winning opening. Control. Alternatively, the opening/closing door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 by the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b
Is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the lower special winning opening.

Then, the special winning opening is won until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. The opening is defined as one round, and the control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52.

Moreover, the game control device 100 operates the lever solenoid 38 that operates the lever member 38i that restricts the inflow of the first special variation winning device 38 into the probability variation operation region 38h in the special game state.
Control f. Then, the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h and the probability variation operating region switch 3
Based on the fact that it is detected in 8d (V passing), it is possible to generate a high probability state after the special game state ends. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the low-probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1
Both the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state. That is, the game control device 100 controls the operation mode for controlling the opening/closing mode of the special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38, second special variation winning device 39) and the operation mode of the inflow restricting member (lever member 38i). Make a means.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 17 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 13, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a top address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when the interrupt occurs. Stack pointer setting process for setting (step X2
)I do. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and the higher order is 00.
h or 01h is set, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6),
A process for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). This makes it possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated because it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11
The operation 2 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the waiting time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the waiting time elapses. Need to continue. However, by reading the status before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step X9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step X10;
N) returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the power failure due to noise, etc. ..

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step X12). If the timer value is not 0 (step X
12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). If the timer value is 0 (step X
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended, access to a read/write RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13), and off data is output (output to all output ports). Is set) (step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15), and read in advance. Then, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step X17), and the normal operation is performed. If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X).
18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19),
It is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (step X2
0). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), step X21 in FIG.
Go to and perform the processing when the power is restored normally.

Also, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y),
When it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17)
N or step X18; N), checksum is not normal (step X20; N)
If it is determined that the process is completed, the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 14 and the initialization process is performed. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. To make.

In step X21 of FIG. 14, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed.

After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared to rationally execute the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X22), and the step Go to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the customer is waiting. Send the command on the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command on the recovery screen. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, or X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X2).
5). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X2).
6). The area to be initialized here is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, step X27
Then, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed, and R is given by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).
A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the AM initialization) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

In step X28, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform the process to activate the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Performed by A. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on
RWM is selected as an initial value (start value) of various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers determining the winning symbol of the special symbol (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number)). After saving in the area (step X30), the interrupt is permitted (step X31). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X32) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit design random number, and the small hit design random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing)
It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on. Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. In other words, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step X32, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and the data bus and checked (for example, twice).
Is set (step X33), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X3).
4). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the initial value random number updating process (
Return to step X32). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step X31) before the initial value random number updating process (step X32), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step X32 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both processes are initialized. In order to prevent the value random number updating process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process when the initial value random number updating process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process.
This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35).
.. When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step X3
5; N) returns to the determination (step X34) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily interrupting is performed (step X36).
), and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X37).

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM and a process (step X41) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X42), it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the start of the slave control device (game control device 100), and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 15 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X4) in the above-mentioned main process.
0) was shown. In this checksum calculation processing, first, RW is set as the start value of the calculated address.
Set the start address of M (step X51) and set the number of repetitions (step X52)
, "0" is set as the calculated value (step X53). RA used for the number of repetitions
The number of M bytes is set.

After that, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X5
4) The calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57:N), the process returns to step X54 and the above processing is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step X57:Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 16 shows the initial value random number updating process (step X32) in the above-mentioned main process. In the initial value random number updating process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number updating process is ended. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG.
The timer interrupt processing of is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X1
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper special winning opening solenoid 38b, lower special winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 of the main process, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105) of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step X106),
Random number update processing 2 (step X107) is performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper special winning opening switch 38a, and the lower special winning opening switch 39a, and error monitoring Winning hole switch/state monitoring process (step X108) that performs (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open)
)I do.

Next, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37.
Is extracted. Then, the special figure 1 game process (step X110) for performing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) for driving the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents, the magnetic sensor 61. Magnet irregularity monitoring processing (step X113) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine whether there is an abnormality, and board radio wave irregularity for processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Monitoring process (step X1
14) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed.

Next, the probability variation operating area switch monitoring process (step X116) is performed. In the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process, the probability variation operation area switch 38d provided in the probability variation operation area 38h is provided.
Processing to monitor the detection of the game ball in. Then, the lever solenoid control process (step X117) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended. Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch input to the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121).
). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X1
24), prepare the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step X125).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X126), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and the switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

Then, prepare the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (step X
129) and prepare the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (step X130).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X131), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), and the switch reading process (step X133) is performed.
Input processing ends.

In the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in the RWM or other memory.
Further, as the information on the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). And 8
If there is an unused bit in the bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step X1
42), after inverting the bit that needs to be inverted (step X143), it is saved (stored) in the port input state 1 of the target switch control area (step X144). Then, it waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (step X145).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal input to the target input port is performed (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is set. It is saved (stored) in (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 in the first read and the second read is created (step X150),
The logical product of the confirmed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken to be the confirmed bit this time (step X151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 0 and the bit having a different state is 1 is created in the first and second readings (step X152), and the logic of the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is taken and the bit is held last time (step X153). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch is removed. Then, the current confirmed bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently confirmed state (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current confirmed states is taken, and the result is saved as the rising edge (step X155), The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reads the switch once for each interrupt processing and compares it with the previous read result to change the signal. Although there is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, if it does so, there is a possibility that correct determination cannot be made when the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost by the time of the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned trouble.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step X104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 11) that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting the data of the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b are combined and output (step X162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line is acquired (step X164), and the acquired information and the external information data are combined (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). Then, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135.
Is output (step X168).

Then, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step X169).
), the combined data and the output data of the emission permission are combined (step X170), and the combined data is output to the external information output port 137 (step X171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. Yes (step X172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test-shooting test apparatus is loaded and combined, and the relay board 7
The combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on 0 (step X175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the payout command transmitting process, first, it is checked whether or not the winning number counter area 2 has a count (step X181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The number-of-wins counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on a prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). And by comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is provided with a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Therefore, the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning port. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), "0" is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not. Then, if there is no count number (step X181:N), the address of the prize number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the check numbers of all prize number counter areas have been completed. (Step X183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks are completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step X183; N), step X1
Returning to 81, the above processing is repeated.

If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X18).
4) The number of payouts corresponding to the target winning number counter area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the remaining number of award balls and the acquired number of payouts are added to obtain a new remaining number of award balls (step X1
86), and save in the remaining number of prize balls area (step X187). As the value of the remaining award ball area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main award ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result, which is a predetermined number as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal (
Step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the result of the subtraction is not saved in the remaining prize ball area, the value before the subtraction is stored in the remaining prize ball area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y)
Updates the value in the main prize ball signal output count region by +1 (step X190), saves the subtraction result in the remaining prize ball count region (step X191), and returns to step X188.

As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the exact result of the big hit occurs. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.

In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193).
When the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y
) Determines whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

The pay-out busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the pay-out control device 200 can immediately start the pay-out control. When the pay-out control cannot be started immediately, the pay-out busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to the idle state or the busy state based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period to a state indicating that the payout control can be immediately started or impossible. To resolve. That is, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period without being transmitted. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout process can be immediately performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

When the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmitting process is ended. It should be noted that here, even in the case of an indefinite state, it is determined that it is busy. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. We are trying to prevent this and reduce the burden of control.

When the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 1 (step X195), “0” is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked among the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not.

Then, if there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are checked. It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (step X197). By this judgment, all the checks are completed (step X19
7; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above processing is repeated.

If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X198), the payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the obtained command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission processing is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and has an initial value of, for example, 200 ms.
Is set.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means is formed.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, and will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and will be backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in conventional gaming machines, a function for backing up is required,
There was a problem that it would lead to higher costs. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.

Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, it is possible to output the main prize ball signal without delay, and the external device such as the hall computer does not pay the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information about the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control comprehensively, the winning area (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the first special variable winning device 38 provided in the gaming area 32. , Based on the game ball control command (game control device 100) which transmits the prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the second special variation winning device 39), and the prize ball command transmitted from the game control device,
A state in which a payout control unit (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of game balls is provided, and the game control unit indicates whether or not the payout control unit output from the payout control unit can start the payout control. A state in which the payout ball command is transmitted to the payout control means based on a signal (busy signal), and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means can start the payout control. Even if the signal is output, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and a state signal indicating that the payout control means can start payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period. Accordingly, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, in the game area 32, winning areas having different numbers of prize balls (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variation winning device 38, second special variation winning device 39) are provided. The plurality of game control means (game control device 100) can specify, for each number of prize balls, whether or not a prize ball command for instructing the payout control of the game balls has not been transmitted (game control device 100). And the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The payout control means sends the status signal to determine whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. I am going to do it.

In addition, the game control is performed comprehensively, and a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second
Starting prize hole 37, general prize hole 35, first special variable prize device 38, second special variable prize device 3
9) Game control means for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to (9) (game control device 100)
) And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means is output from the payout control means. Prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control can start the payout control (
External information for outputting a game control device 100) and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. Output means (game control device 100), and, the external information output means, the state signal output from the payout control means, regardless of whether the payout control means can start the payout control Will be output.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started in the event of a power failure and recovery from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200) and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started in response to the award ball command corresponding to the state continuing for a predetermined period. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). The ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35). , The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) generate a prize ball command in units of one winning, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize information is given in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. It is possible to store a prize ball command that has not been transmitted by updating when a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area and updating it in response to transmission to a prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball into a predetermined prize area, and outputs a prize ball signal each time the cumulative value reaches a predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the prize ball signal counter can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and the prize of the game ball in the predetermined prize area. It is possible to store the number of prize balls that has not been subjected to the accumulation process by updating the data at the same time as the accumulating process of the prize balls by the external information output means.

[Random number update process 1]
In FIG. 22, a random number update process 1 (step X1) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is performed.
06). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start value) of the big hit symbol random numbers and the small hit symbol random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).
In addition, when the big hit design random number is waiting for initial value setting (step X221; Y), the big hit design initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit design random number is handled. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in the register (start value setting register) (step X223). Then, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

When the small hitting symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. In addition, when the small hitting random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224
; Y) is a small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value is loaded (step X225), and the register that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number The value is set in the (start value setting register) (step X226), and the random number updating process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 23 shows a random number update process 2 (step X1) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17).
07). The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 1) as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the random number updating process 2 updates both of them. The update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update processing is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determination random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process
It is configured to be executed for either byte or lower 1 byte.

In this random number updating process 2, first, a random number updating scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of this updating process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed one round.

Then, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). Randomness can be imparted to the random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). Note that the mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, (Called masked value)
1” is added to the mask update value, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X2
37) and proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" as the addition value, and the lower 1
The byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), and the process proceeds to step X239.
Note that adding "1" to the masked value may result in the masked value being "0".
This is to avoid that, since adding "0" later does not change the value before adding.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). , And proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area (1 byte) to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. ) Is set (Step X2
41) and proceeds to step X242.

In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step X243). When the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; N), the new random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is set as the new random number value again (step X244), and this value is set to 1 Byte random number or 2
The data is saved in the lower random number area of the byte random number (step X245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), the new random number value (if a new new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the higher random number area of the 2-byte random number (step X247). )
Then, the random number update process 2 ends.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A, among the various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. The random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 24 shows the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). In this winning opening switch/state monitoring processing, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper winning opening switch 38a in the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step X301), and Illegal & prize monitoring process that monitors whether there is an illegal prize in the big prize hole and detects a normal prize even if the prize hole is not open (
Step X302) is executed.

In the prize-winning mouth monitoring table (illegal monitoring table), a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of the illegality monitoring information, a lower address of the illegal prize number area, and an illegal prize error. Information of an informing command, an upper limit value of the number of fraudulent prizes (the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations), an address of a winning opening switch table, and notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. Further, in the winning opening switch table, information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1 and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. These fraud monitoring table and winning table are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the other lower special winning opening switch 39 in the lower special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39)
The prize-winning mouth monitoring table 2 corresponding to a is prepared (step X303), and the fraud & prize-winning monitoring process (step X304) for monitoring whether there is an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches (here, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a of general winning opening 35) that can always win is prepared (step X305), and the number of winnings. Prize number counter update processing for updating (step X30
Perform 6). Then, the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is planned to be executed is performed (step X307).

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. afterwards,
The gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step X309). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step X310) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like. When the value is set and the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status is set based on the shoot-ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step X312) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state monitoring is set based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch, and the state scan When the counter value is 1, the state monitoring is set based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X313), and if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the process proceeds to step X317. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y
) Prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 (step X314) and performs gaming machine status check processing (step X315) for determining the status such as whether an error has occurred.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 2 that is output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like. Is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, and then proceeds to step X317. It should be noted that the processing of steps X314 to X316 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter, which is updated at each timer interrupt, is 0.
It is executed once per timer interrupt. That is, the timer interrupt is 4m
When it is performed every s, the processing of steps X314 to X316 is performed every 16 ms.

Next, a V abnormal passage monitoring process (step X317) that monitors the detection of an abnormal input at the probability variation operation area switch 38d is performed, and a remaining ball monitoring process that monitors the game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j (step X318). I do. Further, the discharge ball monitoring process (step X319) for monitoring the game balls remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed, and the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is ended.

[V abnormal passage monitoring processing]
FIG. 25 shows the V abnormality passage monitoring processing (step X317) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. In this V abnormal passage monitoring processing, first, the probability variation operating region 38
It is determined whether h is valid (step X251). The probability variation operating area 38h being valid means that the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operating area switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 7). If the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step X251; Y), the process proceeds to step X258. If the probability variation operating region 38h is not valid (step X25
1; N) determines whether or not there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch (step X252).

Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation region switch (step X252; N), the process proceeds to step X258. In addition, when there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch (step X25
2; Y) performs the processing relating to the occurrence of a V abnormal passage error after step X253. The lever member 38i can flow into the probability variation operating region 38h only when the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability variation operating region 38h. Then, while the probability variation operating area switch 38d is effective, the lever member 38i is started when the lever member 38i is in the retracted state, and the game ball that has flown in after the lever member 38i covers the probability variation operating area 38h is the probability variation operating area. The process is terminated when a predetermined time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed, or when the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the probability variation operating region 38h. Therefore, when the probability variation operating region switch 38d is not valid, the input to the probability variation operating region switch 38d is an abnormal state that does not normally occur, and the process relating to the V abnormal passage error is performed.

In the processing relating to the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error, first, the initial value (
Here, the value corresponding to 60 seconds) is saved (step X253), and it is determined whether the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is the error flag (step X254). When the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is the error occurring flag (step X254; Y), that is, when the error has already occurred, the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended.

If the value in the V abnormal passage flag area is not the error flag (step X254)
N), that is, if it is determined that there is an error in this processing, the error occurrence flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step X255), and the V abnormal passage generation command is prepared (step X256). After that, production command setting processing is performed (step X257)
, V abnormal passage monitoring processing ends. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error when the V abnormal passage occurrence command is received.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step X258, it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step X258). When the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step X
258; Y) ends the V abnormal passage monitoring process. In this case, a V abnormal passage error is not occurring. If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step X258; N
) Updates the V abnormal passage notification timer by -1 (step X259) and determines whether the V abnormal passage notification timer has become 0 (step X260).

When the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step X260; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended. In this case, the notification of the V abnormal passage error continues. When the V abnormal passage notification timer reaches 0 (step X260; Y), the normal state flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step X261), and the V abnormal passage cancel command is prepared (step X262). .. After that, production command setting processing is performed (step X263)
, V abnormal passage monitoring processing ends. The effect control device 300 performs a process of ending the error notification in response to the reception of the V abnormal passage cancellation command.

[Remaining ball monitoring process]
FIG. 26 shows the remaining ball monitoring processing (step X318) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. In the remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage opening switch 38g that detects the game ball that has not flown into the probability variation operating region 38h (step X271). When there is no input to the passage switch 38g (step X271; N), the process proceeds to step X273. If there is an input to the passage switch 38g (step X27
1; Y) is -1 if the remaining ball counter managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0.
After updating (step X272), the process proceeds to step X273.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step X273), and if there is no input (step X273; N), the process proceeds to step X275. Also, if there is an input to the probability variation operating area switch 38d (step X273; Y), -1 is updated if the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0 (step X274),
Then, the process proceeds to step X275.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch (step X275), and if there is no input (step X275; N), the process proceeds to step X278. Further, when there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step X275; Y), the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the upper channel 38j is updated by +1 (step X276), and the remaining ball monitoring timer area is set. The timer initial value is saved (step X277), and the process proceeds to step X278. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining a remaining ball error when the game ball stays in the upper flow path 38j for a long time. Here, the initial value is set to be a time sufficiently longer than the time taken from the flow into the upper flow path 38j to the discharge thereof without any abnormality. Further, here, the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, so that the value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds is saved as the initial value so that 3 seconds can be timed.

Next, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step X278), and when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step X278; Y), that is, when there is no game ball in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball is left. The error releasing flag is prepared (step X284), the remaining ball error releasing command is prepared (step X285), and the process proceeds to step X286.

On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step X278; N), that is, the upper flow path 3
If there is a game ball in 8j, it is determined whether or not a residual ball error has already occurred (step X
279). When the remaining ball error is already occurring (step X279; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. If the remaining ball error has not already occurred (step X279; N
) Updates the remaining ball monitoring timer by -1 (step X280) and determines whether the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X281).

When the remaining sphere monitoring timer is not 0 (step X281; N), the remaining sphere monitoring processing ends. If the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X281; Y), the remaining ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step X282), and the remaining ball error occurrence command is prepared (
Step X283). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value in the remaining ball error flag area (step X286).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step X286
Y) ends the remaining ball monitoring process. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step X286; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining ball error flag area (step X287), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X288), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting the error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error occurrence command, and a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error cancellation command.

That is, by the above process, a predetermined time (
If all the game balls have not been discharged from the upper flow path 38j even after the elapse of 3 seconds, the remaining ball error is determined. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread left in the upper flow path 38j.

[Discharge ball monitoring process]
FIG. 27 shows the discharge ball monitoring process (step X319) in the winning port switch/state monitoring process described above. In this discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the game ball discharged from the lower flow path 38k, that is, the game ball discharged from the first special variation winning device 38. (Step X411). Discharge confirmation switch 3
If there is no input to 8e (step X411; N), the process proceeds to step X413. Also,
If there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step X411; Y), the lower flow path 38k
If the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in is not 0, -1 is updated (step X412).
, And proceeds to step X413.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the passage opening switch 38g that detects a game ball that has not flown into the probability variation operating region 38h (step X413), and if there is no input (step X413; N).
Shifts to step X416. If there is an input to the passage opening switch 38g (step X413; Y), the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step X414), and the timer is set in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The initial value is saved (step X415), and the process proceeds to step X416.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability variation operating region switch 38d that detects the game ball that has flown into the probability variation operating region 38h (step X416), and if there is no input (step X416; N).
Shifts to step X419. If the probability variation operation area switch 38d has an input (step X416; Y), the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step X417), and the discharge ball monitoring timer area is set. Save the timer initial value (
Then, the process proceeds to step X418) and step X419.

The passage opening switch 38g and the probability variation operating area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting a game ball flowing into the lower flow path 38k, and the discharge ball counter is incremented by +1 based on the detection of the game ball by these switches. Update and save the timer initial value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharge ball monitoring timer is for determining a discharge ball error when the game ball stays in the lower flow path 38k for a long time. Here, as an initial value, a time that is sufficiently longer than the time taken from when the lower flow path 38k flows into the lower flow path 38k until it is discharged without any abnormality is set.
In addition, since the value is updated by -1 in the following process, the value corresponding to 3 seconds as the initial value +
The value of 1 is saved so that 3 seconds can be timed.

Next, it is determined whether the discharge ball counter is 0 (step X419), and if the discharge ball counter is 0 (step X419; Y), that is, if there is no game ball in the lower flow path 38k, the discharge ball is discharged. The error releasing flag is prepared (step X425), the discharge ball error releasing command is prepared (step X426), and the process proceeds to step X427.

On the other hand, when the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step X419; N), that is, the lower flow path 3
If there is a game ball within 8k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error has already occurred (step X
420). If the discharge ball error is already occurring (step X420; Y),
The discharge ball monitoring process ends. If the discharge ball error has not already occurred (step X4
20; N) updates the discharge ball monitoring timer by -1 (step X421), and determines whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X422).

When the discharge ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step X422; N), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. When the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X422; Y), a discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step X423), and a discharge ball error occurrence command is prepared (
Step X424). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value in the discharge ball error flag area (step X427).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step X427)
Y) ends the discharge ball monitoring process. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step X427; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the discharge ball error flag area (step X428), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X429), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. The effect control device 300 performs the process of starting the error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error occurrence command, and the process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error cancellation command.

That is, by the above processing, a predetermined time (from the last inflow of the game ball into the lower flow path 38k) (
If all the game balls have not been discharged from the lower flow path 38k even after the elapse of 3 seconds, it is determined that a discharge ball error has occurred. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as leaving a game ball attached with a thread (line fishing ball) in the lower flow path 38k.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 28 shows the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process (steps X302, X304) in the above-described winning a prize switch/state monitoring process. This fraud & winning prize monitoring processing is performed by the upper special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39 of the second special variation winning device 39.
This is the process performed on a. Regarding the special winning opening (special variation winning devices 38, 39), it is easy to perform fraud in which the opening/closing door is forcibly opened, the game ball is inserted, and the prize ball is paid out.
In addition to detecting winnings, it also monitors fraud.

In this fraud & winning a prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch which is the error monitoring target is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (
Step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch to be error monitored is the upper special winning port switch 38a, and the winning port to be error monitored. When the switch is the lower special winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened.

When it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X3).
32). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target number of illegal prizes is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal prizes after addition is determined as the number of fraud occurrence determinations of the monitoring target (eg It is determined whether the number exceeds 5 (step X325).

The number of judgments is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the special winning opening, and the game ball is in the effective period of the big winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being determined to be illegal when a prize is passed after passing or when there is noise in a signal, and to not easily determine an error even if it is not illegal.

If the number of judgments does not exceed the number (step X325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). If the number exceeds the judgment number (step X325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the fraud occurrence determination number (step X32).
6) Save the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) in the target illegal prize notification timer area (
Step X327). Next, the target fraud command is prepared (step X328), the fraud prize generation flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

On the other hand, when it is not in the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter updating process (step X331) for setting the winning ball is performed. .. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and it is determined whether or not the notification timer update is permitted (step X333). Then, if the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is ended. If updating of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), -1 is updated if the target notification timer is not 0 (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0. In this embodiment, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335), and if the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step X336), and the fraud prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (Step X337
). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).
..

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal prizes of interest is cleared ( (Step X339), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (
Step X340). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer reaches 0 (step X3
38; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the fraud & winning award monitoring process before the last time, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340).

When the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step X
340; Y) ends the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and the effect command setting process is performed. (
(Step X342), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the occurrence of an error, and an illegal prize winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in response to the error cancellation, and the start and end of error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning prize counter update process]
FIG. 29 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps X306 and X331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch/state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process. In the prize number counter updating process, first, the number of prize hole switches to be monitored is acquired from the prize hole switch table of the prize hole monitoring table (step X351), and input to the target prize hole switch (correctly, change of input). ) Is determined (step X352).

If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362). When there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (
Step X357). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step X35).
9). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362). If an overflow occurs (step X3
59; Y) updates the table address to the address of the next record (step X36).
1), it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process (step X352) of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is completed.
By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Production command setting process]
In FIG. 30, the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-mentioned fraud & prize monitoring process is performed.
)showed that. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371).
, It is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

When the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (
Write MODE (upper byte) to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373).
), the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (
ACTION (lower byte) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step X3).
76), the effect command setting process ends.

In this way, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the load on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. In addition, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to take in the command in the strobe, and the load can be reduced.

[Special figure 2 Abnormal variation monitoring processing]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process (
Step X307) is shown. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, but this is known. It is conceivable that a player who does not exist or a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game makes a right hit. In the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process, a process for giving a notification to such a player to perform left-handed play is performed.

It should be noted that the abnormal variation here means an irregular variation, which is a non-mainly special figure variation display game. Even in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, it is possible to win to the second start winning port 37, so even if the variation is irregular, it is a valid special figure variation display game and the thread is attached. It is different from an illegal act in which a special prize variation display game is executed by illegally detecting a prize due to the use of a game ball or magnet, the emission of radio waves, or the like. However, it is not desirable that the special character variation display game, which is the main feature of the game machine design, be continued to be executed.Here, such irregular variation is detected. The number of abnormal changes in special figure 2 is counted, and when the number of abnormal changes in special figure 2 reaches a specified value, a corresponding process is performed.
Of course, the special figure 2 variation display game in which irregularity is detected by illegally detecting a prize at the second start winning port 37 due to the use of a game ball or magnet with a thread, emission of radio waves, etc. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is counted. That is, the number of abnormal fluctuations in special figure 2 is counted when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which irregular fluctuations are executed regardless of whether or not it is an illegal act.

In the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 change check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game is a main variable special figure (normal game state ST1 or second specific game state ST3). It is a flag. If there is no special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; N), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). If there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; Y),
The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

Then, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 is smaller than a specified value (eg, 18) (step X3
84), if it is smaller than the specified value (step X384; Y), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). When the value is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable special figure (normal game state ST1).
Alternatively, if the special figure 2 abnormal variation number added by the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game in the second specific game state ST3) is not 0, -1 is updated (step X385), and the special figure 1 variation number is changed. 0
After clearing (step X386), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). The minimum value of the number of abnormal fluctuations in Toku-zu 2 is set to 0.

The special figure 2 check flag is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is started in the state where the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable special figure (normal game state ST1 or second specific game state ST3). It is a flag. Judgment whether there is this special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387
), there is no special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387; N), it means step X
Move to 390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 variation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is incremented by +1.
It is updated (step X389), and it is determined whether the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than a specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is started in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable special figure (normal game state ST1 or second specific game state ST3), that is, irregular variation 2 The special figure 2 check flag is set based on the start of the variable display game, and based on the setting of the special figure 2 check flag, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number that is the abnormality determination number is updated in the direction of occurrence of the abnormality ( Here, it will be added). In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation special figure (normal game state ST1 or second specific game state ST3) special figure 1
The fluctuation display game is started, that is, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that is the main fluctuation is started, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number, which is the number of abnormal cancellations, is updated (added here), and the abnormal cancellation is performed. Based on the fact that the number satisfies the predetermined condition, the special variation 2 abnormal variation number forming the abnormality determination number is updated (here, subtracted) in the abnormality canceling direction. Therefore, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormality determination number management unit that updates the abnormality determination number in the abnormality occurrence direction based on the start of a non-mainly variable display game.

Special figure 2 If the number of abnormal fluctuations is not smaller than the specified value (step X390; N), the special figure 2
The number of abnormal fluctuations is set to the specified value -1 (step X391), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is set in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (step X392). Next, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, although the player is in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3 in which it is recommended that the player strikes left and advances the game mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game, the player strikes right. In this case, the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and processing for giving a notification prompting the player to make a left hit is performed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time has expired (step X396). ). If the time has not expired (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process ends. When the time is up (step X396; Y
) Prepares the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag (step X397), and prepares the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command (step X398).

Then, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the current value in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step X399). Then, when the prepared flag is equal to the current value of the special variation 2 abnormal variation flag area (step X399; Y), that is, when there is no state change,
Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing ends. If the prepared flag is not the same as the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (step X399; N), that is, if there is a change in state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal variation release flag. Is determined (step X4
00).

If the prepared flag is not the Toku-zu 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is the Toku-zu 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the Toku-zu 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (Step X402), effect command setting processing is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring processing is ended. On the other hand, if the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (
In step X400; Y), after clearing the special figure 2 abnormal variation number to 0 (step X401)
Then, the processes of steps X402 and X403 are performed (step X403), and the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process is ended. By the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal variation generation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 upon detection of the special figure 2 abnormal change, and the special figure 2 abnormal change release command is issued along with the cancellation of the special figure 2 abnormal change. It is transmitted to 300 and the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormality change notification are set.

32 and 33 show an example of the process of the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 32, in the normal game state ST1, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 3
Thus, the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 is fifteen. When the next Toku-zu 1 variation display game is started from this state (t11), the Toku-zu 1 variation number changes from 15 to 16. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t12), the number of abnormal changes in special figure 2 changes from 3 to 4.

After that, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t1
3, t14). Here, when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 reaches 18 which is a prescribed value (t14), the special figure 2
The number of abnormal fluctuations is updated by -1 to change from 4 to 3, and the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 is cleared to 0. Similarly thereafter, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 variation number reaches the prescribed value 18, (t17), Toku-zu 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is updated by -1 and changes from 3 to 2, and the number of fluctuations of Toku-zu 1 is cleared to 0. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted every time the prescribed number (here, 18 times) of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

FIG. 33 shows the case where the special figure 2 abnormality change notification is performed. In this example, the normal game state ST
In No. 1, the special figure 2 has a number of abnormal fluctuations of three. When the special figure 2 variation display game is started from this state (t21), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated from 3 to 4. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches 5, which is a prescribed value.

As a result, the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, the external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred and the output of the gaming machine error status signal to the device outside the gaming machine are started, It becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of the abnormal change of the special figure 2 with the management device of the amusement store. Further, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Performance control device 300
Then, based on the reception of this command, the fact that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred is displayed or displayed. That is, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 form a corresponding means for performing a predetermined response based on the abnormality determination number (the special figure 2 abnormality variation number) satisfying a predetermined condition (being a specified value).

Further, when the Toku-zu 2 abnormal change notification timer reaches the specified value of 5, the Toku-zu 2 abnormal change notification timer starts counting (t22), and a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses ( t
23), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error status signal is stopped. Moreover, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred based on the reception of this command.

The special figure 2 abnormal variation number is set to a prescribed value -1 (here 4) after it is determined that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred and the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is newly started before the elapse of the predetermined time, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 becomes the specified value, and the timing of the predetermined time is newly started from that point. As a result, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed despite the fact that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has been informed, the notification period is extended accordingly.

In this way, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred based on the number of special figure 2 abnormal changes reaching a prescribed value (for example, 5), for example, a game ball is unintentionally entered in the right game area. It is possible to prevent immediately from being determined to be an abnormal change in Toku-zu 2 when the second start winning port 37 is won. Further, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted by playing the special figure 1 variation display game a predetermined number of times, so that the special figure 2 abnormal variation that has occurred about the unintended winning of the second start winning opening 37 The number will be canceled if the player is playing a game thereafter, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake or a cumulative result of the games of other players from being determined to be the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation.

It should be noted that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number that gives the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification and the specified value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number that performs the process of subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number are arbitrarily set. It can be set.
What is the respective prescribed value set here as long as it can prevent the player from aiming at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3? Any value is acceptable. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored, monitoring should be restarted from the state before the power failure occurred. Even when the special map 2 abnormality change notification is performed, the payout of prize balls for winning is performed as usual.

[Game machine status check process]
In FIG. 34, the gaming machine state check process in the above-described winning hole switch/state monitoring process (
Steps X310, X312, X315) are shown. In this gaming machine status check process,
First, the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step X451).
, It is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and the signal. ON determination data, status off command (error notification end command in case of error system), status on command (error notification start command in case of error system), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step X453), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X4
55), and compares the value of the target signal control area with the current signal state (step X459).
When the target signal is not ON (step X452: N), it means that the error signal is not an error (normal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that it is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step X452: Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step X456), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). After that, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step X45).
9). When the target signal is ON (step X452: Y), it means that the error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and the signal from the touch switch is touching. Is a state indicating.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step X459; Y)
, That is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (
In step X462), it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). When the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal status (step X459; N), that is, when the signal status has changed, the current signal status is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X460). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X462). Step X463).

When the value of the target status monitoring timer is not greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N
) Ends the gaming machine state check processing. If the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the comparison value -1 (step X464) and prepared. The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is executed. After that (step X467), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 35 shows the payout busy signal check processing (step X316) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. In this payout busy signal check process, first,
It is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 3) is set.
2 ms) is set (step X473). If the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), the busy state flag is prepared as the state flag (step X4).
74), set the ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) (step X475)
..

After that, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether there is an on/off change (step X476). If they are the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). Also,
If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X47).
8), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than the previously set ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, whether the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step X480). If the signal confirmation time has not been reached (step X4
80; N) ends the payout busy signal check process. When the signal confirmation time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value set by -1 is set. (Step X4
81), save the prepared status flag in the pay-out busy signal flag area (step X48).
2) The pay-out busy signal check process is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time,
Even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues for the signal settling time. Making it hard to receive.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes indefinite until any signal state continues for the signal fixing time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 continuously for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout process can be immediately performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the starting port switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (step X109)
Will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 36, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, a starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information about the winning of the starting mouth set when the jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition processing (step X493).

If the information regarding the existence of the starting opening winning combination is not set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no winning of the starting opening is set. On the other hand, when the information regarding the winning of the starting opening is set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether it is the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state (step X494). ). Then, in the normal game state or the second specific game state (step X494; Y), the process moves to step X497. If it is not the normal game state or the second specific game state (step X494; N), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X496).
). After that, a table for setting the information held by the starting opening 1 is prepared (step X497).
), special figure starting port 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

Based on the reception of the right-handing instruction notification command, the production control device 300 gives a right-handing instruction notification that instructs the player to make a right-handed stroke by display or voice. When it is other than the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, that is, the first specific game state ST
2 In the special game state, right-handed is more advantageous to the player, and if the left-handed player does not win, the right-handed instruction notification is given when a winning is detected at the first start winning port 36. I have to.

Next, the starting opening 2 (second starting winning opening 37) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X499).
), a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X500), and it is determined whether or not there is information regarding the winning of the winning opening which is set when the jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501).

When the information regarding the existence of the starting opening winning combination is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no winning of the starting opening is set. On the other hand, when the information regarding the winning of the starting opening is set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the first specific game state (step X502). Then, in the case of the first specific game state (step X5
02; Y) moves to step X507. If it is not the first specific game state (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not it is during the big hit, that is, the first special game state which is the special game state based on the big hit (step X503).

If it is a big hit (step X503; Y), the process moves to step X507. If the jackpot is not in progress (step X503; N), it is determined whether the first final variation is in progress (step X504). During the first final variation, the special figure variation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) since the first special game state has ended and the first specific game state has been reached (including stop time). That is, the final special figure variation display game in which the lottery has been performed in the first specific game state is being executed.

If it is during the first final fluctuation (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the first final variation is not in progress (step X504; N), a left-hand instruction command notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506).
). After that, a table for setting the information held by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step X507).
), the special figure starting port 2 switch process is performed (step X508), and the starting port switch monitoring process ends.

In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the left-handing instruction notification command, the left-handing instruction notification for instructing the player to perform left-handing is given by display or voice. In the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player, and the winning is detected at the second start winning port 37 which is designed not to win the game unless it is right-handed. In this case, the left-handed instruction is informed.

In the first special game state, the first special variation winning device 38 may be opened, so that the left hitting instruction is not notified. Also, in the special figure variation display game that is executed last in the first specific game state, it is changed to the low-probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, so the low-probability state is in the game. Is highly likely to occur in a special game state because the determination is made in a high probability state. Also, in order to produce the first specific game state until the end of the game, do not issue the left-handing instruction notification. ing.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
In FIG. 37, a hard random number acquisition process (step X
492, X500). In this hard random number acquisition processing, first, the information regarding no starting mouth winning is set (step X511), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (step X).
512).

When there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target switch has an input (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513) and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514; Y), the jackpot random number extracted to the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the information regarding the existence of a winning opening is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

[Special figure start opening 1 switch processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure starting port 1 switch process (step X498) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above. In the special figure starting port 1 switch processing, first, the first starting winning port 3
The number of times the starting opening signal 1 is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to 6 is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (step X521), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522). ), it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X523).
). If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold count (first start storage count) is set. Is less than the upper limit (step X525). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525.
Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255. However, when the upper limit is stored, the value is not saved because the value is updated to +1 and loops to 0.

When the number of special figure 1 reservations is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of fluctuation patterns is set in the special figure reservation information determination processing described later ( (Step X526), the special figure 1 reservation number is updated by +1 (Step X527).
). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared by the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition processing is RW.
Save to the big hit random number storage area of M (step X529).

Then, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Furthermore, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and R
It is saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the WM (step X532). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). And, the special figure reservation information decision processing which is pre-reading processing (step X
534) to prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step X535), perform an effect command setting process (step X536), and finish the special figure starting port 1 switch process. .. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36, and store the predetermined random number as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It constitutes a first starting storage means.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure reservation information determination process (step X534) in the special figure starting port 1 switch process described above. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 starting memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 starting memory. In this special figure reservation information determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific game state (step X541), and if it is the first specific game state (step X541; Y).
) Ends the special figure reservation information determination process. If it is not the first specific game state (step X541; N), it is determined whether or not it is during the big hit, that is, the first special game state which is a special game state based on the big hit (step X542).

When the big hit is in progress (step X542; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended.
In addition, when it is not the big hit (step X542; N), the big hit decision processing which decides whether or not it is the big hit depending on whether or not the big hit random number value agrees with the big hit decision value (step X).
543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546), A read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value.
Step X547). Then, if the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop symbol information for the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). Further, if the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X550), and the prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing the read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551),
Perform effect command setting processing (step X552). Next, the special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) of setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed to set the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game. Processing is performed (step X554).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step X556), and finish the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process in step X554 are the special figure 1 variation start processes of the special figure 1 normal process that are executed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. Is the same as.

By the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 starting memory and the information of the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 starting memory are included. A prefetching variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 starting memory is changed to the special figure 1 variation based on the corresponding special figure 1 starting memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 prior to the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game is started. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result and the variation mode information of the first variable display game before the start of the first variable display game based on the first startup memory stored in the first startup storage means. It constitutes a possible first determining means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment whether or not) forms a pre-determination means Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

The special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done Further, the prefetching process is not performed when the game is in the first specific game state. This is a state in which the first special game state is mainly the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly disengaged by deriving a special result in this special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped as a result. That is, it is meaningless to inform the pre-reading result because most of them are out of order, and it is forcibly changed to the out-of-place result after informing the pre-reading result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the contradiction may occur.

However, since the starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated for the special figure 2 variable display game, it is special when the first starting memory is present in the first period of the first specific game state. It is highly likely that only the variable display game will be played.
The look-ahead effect may be performed for the starting memory. First to perform such prefetching effect
Of the starting memory, the pre-reading process is performed for the one that occurs before the start of the first specific game state, so the result is used, and for the one that occurs after the start of the first specific game state, such pre-reading is performed. The look-ahead processing is performed for the object to be rendered. Of course, the prefetching process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and whether to perform the prefetching effect based on the result of the prefetching process may be determined in another process.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure starting port 2 switch process (step X508) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above. In the special figure starting port 2 switch processing, first, the second starting winning port 3
The number of times the starting opening signal 2 is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to 7 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded (step X561), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562). ), it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563).
). If the output count does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 2 output count area (step X564), and the start port 2 (
Second start winning opening 37) It is determined whether the winning is invalid.

Starting mouth 2 winning award invalid means that the special figure 1 variable display game with a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during the special figure display process described later), the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. When this winning opening 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y)
Ends the special figure starting port 2 switch process. If the starting opening 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 reservation number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), save the jackpot random numbers prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing described above in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the big hit symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Furthermore, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 2 switch processing is ended. That is, the game control device 100
However, based on the inflow of the game ball into the second start winning opening 37, it constitutes a starting winning storing means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number. The variation pattern random number 1 is not used in the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few types of variation patterns.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
showed that. Toku-zu 1 Controls the entire process related to the variable display game and sets the display of Toku-zu 1.
In the special figure 1 game process, first, during a big hit/small hit of the special figure 2, that is, during a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. Is determined (step Y101).

When it is not during the big hit/small hit of special figure 2 (step Y101; N), big winning opening switch supervisory processing is done (step Y102), -1 is updated if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y103). ). In addition, when the big hit/small hit of special figure 2 is in progress (step Y1
01; Y) moves to step Y103.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, game balls are played with the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Perform a process to monitor the detection. In the special figure 1 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed when the result of the game is a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special FIG. 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special processing 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119 to perform the subsequent processing. When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the processing branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special-figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to above is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is “0”, the change start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game are set. Figure 1
Special processing for setting information required for processing during fluctuations 1 Normal processing (step Y108)
I do. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game process number is "1", the special display for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process 1 During change processing (step Y109) is performed.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type Special Figure 1 Processing during display (Fanfare time setting according to the special winning opening pattern, information necessary for processing during fanfare/interval, etc.)
Step Y110) is performed.

In step Y107, when the special processing number 1 game processing number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening The special winning opening opening process (step Y112) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the remaining ball process.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is "5", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round,
Special figure 1 The special winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending processing is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is "6" at step Y107, the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit are performed. Small hitting fanfare processing (step Y1)
15) is performed. When the special figure 1 game process number is "8" at step Y107, a small hit mid-range process (step Y116) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. To do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls won in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process, and the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y117) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the special figure 1 game process number is "10" in step Y107, the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is prepared (
(Step Y119), the symbol variation control process (step Y120) relating to the special figure 1 display device 51 is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is ended. The special figure 1 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the above timer interrupt process.
showed that. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process is basically the same as the special figure 1 game process described above with respect to the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, during the big hit/small hit of the special figure 1, that is, during the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. Is determined (step Y131). When the big hit/small hit of special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y13).
2) If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y133). When the big hit/small hit of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), step Y133.
Move to.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, game balls are played with the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Perform a process to monitor the detection. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on whether the game result is a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of this special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N)
Updates the repeat count of the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (step Y150).
The long variation timer value (here, 60000 ms) is saved in the game processing timer area (step Y151), and the processing from step Y152 is performed.

To prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state The variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in ST3 is a very long time (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the variable time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variable time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of times of repetition, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here, 60000 ms).

If the number of repetitions of the special processing 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y),
The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y137.
), a subroutine call by the game process number of special figure 2 is performed (step Y138).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is “0”, the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game are set. Figure 2
Special figure 2 normal processing for setting the information necessary to perform the changing processing (step Y139)
I do. If the special figure 2 game process number is "1" in step Y138, the special figure that sets the stop display time of special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process is specified. 2 The changing process (step Y140) is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, setting of a fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type Special figure 2 processing during displaying special fan 2 which sets the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and the information required for processing during fanfare/interval (
Step Y141) is performed.

At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform the fanfare/interval processing (step Y142). At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening The special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round,
Special figure 2 The special winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending processing is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step Y138, the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y145) that sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process (step Y108) I do.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit are performed. Small hitting fanfare processing (step Y1)
46) is performed. When the special figure 2 game process number is "8" at step Y138, a small hit mid-range process (step Y147) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. To do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls winning in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process, and the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game process number is "10" in step Y138, the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process is performed.

Then, prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (
(Step Y152), the symbol variation control process (step Y153) relating to the special figure 2 display device 52 is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is ended. The special figure 2 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
FIG. 43 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring processing (steps Y102 and Y132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is open (step Y161). When the upper special winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the upper prize hole is not open (step Y161;
N) determines whether or not the remaining balls of the upper special winning opening are being processed (step Y162). The remaining ball processing in this determination includes both a big winning opening remaining ball processing based on a big hit and a small hit remaining ball processing based on a small hit.

When the remaining balls of the special winning opening are being processed (step Y162; Y), step Y166
Move to. In addition, when the remaining balls of the upper prize hole are not being processed (step Y162; N),
It is determined whether the lower major winning opening (the second special variation winning device 39) is open (step Y16).
3). When the lower special winning opening is not open (step Y163; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when the lower prize hole is open (step Y163;
Y) determines whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y164).

In addition, during the opening in steps Y161 and Y163, during the opening in the first special game state is a special game state based on the first special result (big hit), and the special game state based on the second special result (small hit) Including both during the opening in the second special game state is. Also, step Y1
In the determination of 61 to Y163, the determination may be made by referring to the special processing number 1 or the special processing number 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set is set and this flag is set. You may make it based on this.

When there is no input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y164; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y164;
Y) sets 1 in the prize counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening, which is added in the present special winning opening switch monitoring processing (step Y165), and proceeds to step Y175.

On the other hand, in the step Y166 which shifts to the case where the upper special winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or the remaining balls of the upper special winning opening are being processed (step Y162; Y),
The winning counter is set to 0 (step Y166). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y175.

If there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch (step Y167; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step Y168) and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variation winning device 38, a special winning opening count command is transmitted in order to perform an effect by winning. Furthermore, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

After that, when the value of the winning prize counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), during the big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y176; Y) or during the small hit remaining ball processing (step Y177; Y) In either case, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. Also,
The value of the winning prize counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (
If the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y177; N), the value of the winning prize counter is added to the special winning opening count number (step Y178), and the large winning prize count number reaches the upper limit value (one). It is determined whether or not the number has reached or exceeded the number of game balls that can be won in the round (step Y179).

When the number of winning prize counts is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (here, 9) (step Y17)
9; N) ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. When the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step Y180) and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181
). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being opened, that is, the jackpot is in the first special game state, which is the special game state based on the jackpot (step Y182).

If the jackpot is not being opened (step Y182; N), that is, if the jackpot is being opened, the jackpot opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the jackpot is being opened (step Y182; Y), the value for ending the jackpot opening operation is saved in the jackpot control pointer area (step Y183), and the jackpot switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

In addition, you may make it transmit a special winning opening count command to the effect control apparatus 300 also when there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y164; Y). Further, when there is remaining ball processing for the lower special winning opening, the special winning hole count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even when the lower special winning opening switch is input during the remaining ball processing. You can

[Special processing 1 usual processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start changing in this determination is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 2 variable display game in which the big hit or the small hit occurs until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to determine this here.

If the special figure 1 cannot start changing (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal process ends. Further, when the special map 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction notification has been made, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), step Y
Move to 206. If the left-hand instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N),
A left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (
Step Y204). After that, a left-hand instruction command notification flag is set (step Y205),
It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206). The left-hand instruction command notification flag is
It is designed to be cleared when the special figure variation display game lastly performed in the first specific game state is finished, whereby the left-handing instruction notification is given when shifting to the normal game state. ..

If the number of reserved special characters 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), step Y217
Move to. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y208). After that, the special figure 1 variation start processing for setting information on the special figure 1 variable display game and the like is performed (step Y210), and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). , Production command setting processing is performed (step Y212). In addition, the processing for preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y21
At the time of performing 0), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number minus -1 from the current special figure 1 hold number. Preparing a few commands.

Next, the change of special figure 1 is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y21).
2). Here, the special map status indicates the state of the special map variable display game, and is 0 to 5
Is set. Special map status 0 indicates that neither the special map 1 variable display game nor the special map 2 variable display game is running, and the special map status 1 indicates that only the special map 1 variable display game is running. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. There is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is the special game state based on the small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific game state (step Y213). Then, in the case of the first specific game state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Also,
If it is not in the first specific game state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether the first final variation is in progress (step Y214). During the first final variation, the special figure variation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) since the first special game state has ended and the first specific game state has been reached (including stop time). That is, the final special figure variation display game in which the lottery has been performed in the first specific game state is being executed.

When the first final variation is being performed (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the first final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is started in the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state.
After that, the special figure 1 changing process shift setting processing is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 normal processing ends.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal process, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start changing in this determination is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 1 variable display game in which the big hit or the small hit occurs until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to determine this here.

When the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal process is ended. Further, when the special map 2 can start changing (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 is reserved (second
The starting memory) is temporarily stored in order to perform the starting process of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning when the second starting winning opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. This is not for suspending the start of the special figure variation display game like the first starting memory.

Then, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 variation start processing for setting information regarding the special figure 2 variation display game and the like is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 varying state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific game state (step Y227). Then, in the case of the first specific game state (step Y227; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. Also,
When it is not the first specific game state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether the first final variation is being performed (step Y228). During the first final variation, the special figure variation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) since the first special game state has ended and the first specific game state has been reached (including stop time). That is, the final special figure variation display game in which the lottery has been performed in the first specific game state is being executed.

When the first final variation is being performed (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If the first final variation is not in progress (step Y228; N), the special figure 2 variation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state.
After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y231). Then, if the number of reserved special maps 1 is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether or not the special maps 1 are changing (step Y232). If the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233). If it is not disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Performs processing related to settings. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y23
1; N), if Toku-zu 1 is changing (step Y232; Y) or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step Y233; Y), the process proceeds to step Y237.

In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y234), and the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and the effect is produced. Command setting processing is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without the backup function loses the information on the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change of the game state is transmitted. It will be possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and the probability state may change due to the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thereby, the performance control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

Further, by transmitting the variation start probability information command each time the special figure variation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. Therefore, it is possible to return to the effect according to the game state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the production control device 300 to return to the production according to the game state when restarted.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
In FIG. 46, the special figure 1 variation start process in the special figure 1 normal process described above (step Y209).
showed that. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. First, the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step Y241), and deviation information is included as result information of the special figure 1 variation display game. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting jackpot information or jackpot information is performed.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting processing (step Y) relating to the setting of special figure 1 stop design (design information)
243) is performed, special figure 1 information setting processing (step Y244) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step Y245).

After that, the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the variation display game, is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y246) is performed, and the variation start information setting process (step Y247) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after this, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly removed regardless of the lottery result. It ends as a result. Especially, since the special figure 2 variable display game is always a big hit or a small hit, such processing is performed for the special figure 1 variable display game when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first. Therefore, for example, even though the special figure 1 variable display game is being produced with a high degree of expectation, the player will be forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result, and the player will feel distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will be ended before the special figure 1 variable display game that is about to be started, it is possible to take measures such as not selecting an effect with high expectations. I am trying.

Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific game state (step Y248), and if it is the first specific game state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of the first specific game state, it is a state in which the game progresses mainly on the special figure 2 variable display game.
In this state, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and is executed with high frequency, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the deviation result. In the special figure 1 variable display game, special processing is not performed here because it is set in advance so that an effect with high expectation is not selected.

In addition, if it is not the first specific game state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the first final variation is in progress (step Y249). During the first final variation, the special figure variation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) since the first special game state has ended and the first specific game state has been reached (including stop time). That is, the final special figure variation display game in which the lottery has been performed in the first specific game state is being executed.

When it is in the first final variation (step Y249; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. Since the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the first final variation, is stopped in a short time, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game to be started will be forcibly stopped in a short time. Therefore, even if an effect with high expectation is selected for the special figure 1 variable display game, it will end before the effect is started. Therefore, here is a process for preventing the effect with high expectation from being selected. Does not.

When the first final fluctuation is not occurring (step Y249; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250). When Toku-zu 2 is not changing (step Y250; N
) Moves to step Y257. In this case, since it is the normal game state or the second specific game state, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the change time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a very long change time. Therefore, since there is little possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, here, the processing for preventing the production with high expectation from being selected is not performed.

When the Toku-zu 2 is changing (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is 0 (Step Y251). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254.
In addition, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N)
Determines whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y2
52).

Special Figure 2 When the number of times the game processing timer is repeated is 4 or more (step Y252; Y)
Moves to step Y257. In this case, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, so that an effect with high expectation is not selected. No processing is done.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252
;N) calculates the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y253), and is the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game? Is determined (step Y254). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y)
Moves to step Y257. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, so processing for preventing the production having a high expectation from being selected is not performed.

If the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), the fact that the variation time of special figure 1 is longer is notified. A command is prepared (step Y255), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y256). After that, a high-probability fluctuation number update process is performed to manage the period in which the high-probability state is set (step Y257), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process ends. Performance control device 30
In 0, based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is longer,
With respect to the special figure 1 variable display game, processing such as restricting selection of effects with high expectations is performed.

When the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (
Information on the variation pattern set in step Y246) (variation pattern numbers in the first and second half)
The effect control device 300 may change the variable pattern to a variable pattern that does not select an effect with high expectations. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern,
The variable time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process (step Y255) of preparing a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer may or may not be performed.

That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern process (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100.
), when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variable display game in the normal gaming state, the variation mode information of the first variable display game without referring to the variation mode information of the second variable display game. It constitutes a first variation mode determining means capable of determining. Further, the process of resetting the above-described variation pattern performed in the game control device 100 is the second variation display game when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determination means. Is being executed, by referring to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variable display game, information regarding the variation pattern can be displayed without changing the determined variation time of the first variable display game. It constitutes a second variation mode determination means that can be re-determined.

Further, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246)
At the time of determining the variation pattern in step 1, it is determined whether the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y25).
By carrying out 4), the variation pattern according to the game situation may be decided from the beginning.

In addition, when the deviation result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is special only when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. The process (step Y254) of determining whether it is less than the remaining variation time of the variation display game of FIG. 2 is performed. Special figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is out of order, special figure 1
This process is unnecessary because the variable display game is not forcibly stopped as a result.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
In FIG. 47, the special map 2 variation start process in the special map 2 normal process described above (step Y225).
showed that. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. First, the special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step Y261), and the deviation information is the result information of the special figure 2 variation display game. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting jackpot information or jackpot information is performed.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y) concerning the setting of special figure 2 stop design (design information)
263) is performed, a special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of settings relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step Y265).

After that, the special pattern 2 which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 variable display game is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y266) is performed, and the variation start information setting process (step Y267) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed are determined. After that, the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process is performed to manage the period in which the high-probability state is set (step Y
268), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

In the special figure 2 variation start process, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation that can be executed at the same time can be executed.
No processing is performed for adjustment so as not to cause inconvenience during the variable display game. this is,
This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, and there are few opportunities for the special figure 2 variable display game to be forcibly ended with a miss result. However, as in the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result, the selection of the production with high expectation may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 48 shows a jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process.
242). In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1).

After that, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit judgment of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y).
) Moves to step Y279. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y275; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

When the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is not a jackpot (step Y277; N), whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is a jackpot or not. A small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed.

If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y271. Then (step Y281), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not the small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the off information is saved in the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 49 shows a jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process.
262). In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero.

After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y).
) Moves to step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y295; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y296) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is a jackpot or not. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.

If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y291. Then (step Y301), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not the small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. In this case, the off information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
FIG. 50 shows the big hit determination processing (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing described above. In this jackpot determination process, first,
The lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step Y311), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317) and the big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312).
N) determines whether or not there is a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, in the high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If it is not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ..

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316
; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, a big hit is set as a determination result (step Y31).
8) Then, the big hit determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 51 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first,
It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and if the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y),
That is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result indicates that the lottery for the small hit has been missed. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the decision is for the special figure 1 variable display game. (Step Y322).

When the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit judgment value for special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). In addition, when the information of special figure 1 is not being set (
Step Y322; N), that is, in the case of the determination regarding the special figure 2 variable display game,
The small hit upper limit judgment value for special figure 2 is set (step Y324), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y327), and the small hit judgment process is ended. To do.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 52, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y in the special figure 1 variation start process described above.
243). In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1
The big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y3
32). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in the special design 1 stop design save area (
Step Y334). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forced to change.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 1 stop design pattern area (
Step Y336). The stop pattern is a special map display (here, special map 1 display 51)
It is for setting the stop symbol in and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired. Special figure 1
It is saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y
340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol design table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol save area (step Y342). By this processing, the small hit type is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y).
346).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped specially 1 It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above process, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing 1 command is saved in the decoration special drawing 1 command area (step Y347).
) And effect command setting processing (step Y348). This decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), the special figure. The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stopped symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 53, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y in the special figure 2 variation start process described above.
263). The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y).
361; Y) loads the big hit symbol random number from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number which corresponds to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and it saves in the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y364). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved not in the special figure 2 stop symbol area but in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forced to change.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 2 stop design pattern area (
Step Y366). A stop symbol pattern is a special map display (here, special map 2 display 52)
It is for setting the stop symbol in and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired. Special figure 2
It is saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and if it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit design table is set (step Y371), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 2 stop design save area is saved (step Y3).
72). By this processing, the small hit type is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373),
A decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step Y376).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y374), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped specially 2 It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). By the above process, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing 2 command is saved in the decoration special drawing 2 command area (step Y377).
) And effect command setting processing (step Y378). This decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
54. In FIG. 54, the special map 1 information setting process (step Y24
4) is shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific game state (step Y401). When it is not the first specific game state (step Y401; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y403)
, Special figure 1 big hit, namely, it decides whether or not the special figure 1 stop design pattern is the big hit stop design pattern (step Y404).

If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412.
If the special figure 1 big hit is not (step Y404; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is the stop symbol pattern of the small hit (step Y40).
5). If it is not the special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is not, the process proceeds to step Y407. If the special figure is a small hit (step Y4
05; Y), the value is updated by adding the special figure 1 reservation number to the latter half offset data (step Y).
406), the special figure 1 reservation number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y4).
07) and proceeds to step Y412.

On the other hand, if it is the first specific game state (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y408). If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y40
8; N) sets the first half offset data for the first special game state special figure 1 deviation/small hit (step Y409), and sets the second half offset data for special figure 1 length variation (step Y411). If the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 big hit during the first specific game state is set (step Y410), and the latter half offset data for special figure 1 length variation Is set (step Y411).

The first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). The setting process ends.

That is, in the special game 1 variation display game in the normal game state and the second specific game state, in the case of a small hit, the variation pattern considering the special figure 1 hold number is determined for both the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern. In the case of deviation, only in the first half variation pattern, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 pending number, and in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 pending number. To In the special figure 1 variable display game in the first specific game state, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 hold number.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
In FIG. 55, the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above is performed.
4) is shown. In the special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific game state (step Y421). In the case of the first specific game state (step Y421; Y), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired ( (Step Y423)
, Step Y428.

On the other hand, if it is not the first specific game state (step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). And, when it is not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y42
4; N) sets the first half offset data for the normal game state and the second specific game state special figure 2 deviation/small hit (step Y425), and sets the second half offset data for special figure 2 length variation (step Y425). Step Y427). Also, if the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y424; Y)
Sets the first half offset data for the special game 2 big hit in the normal game state and the second specific game state (step Y426), and sets the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation (step Y427).

The first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429). The setting process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting processing (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing. The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern that is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state, and the second half variation that is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set first.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the addresses of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 are acquired and prepared (step Y452). , Special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (
The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the number for holding 1 and prepared (step Y453).

Next, it deviates from the special figure 1, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the disengaged stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and if the special figure 1 is deviant (step Y454; Y), 2
Byte allocation processing is performed (step Y455), and the process proceeds to step Y457. If the special map 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), a distribution process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. If the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but if the result is off, the distribution value is 2 in order to enable various effects.
It has become a part-time job.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of special figure 1. To prepare (step Y458). Then, the distribution process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variation number area is saved (step Y460). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
(Step Y463), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 to prepare (step Y464).

After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is ended. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the latter half fluctuation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). The variable pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 and prepared (step Y473).

Next, a distribution process is performed (step Y474), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and the latter half variation number is saved in the second half variation number area (step Y475). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Then, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y476), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y477).
Next, obtain the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer and prepare (
(Step Y478), the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area of Toku-zu 2 and prepared (step Y479).

After that, the distribution process (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is ended. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is set. In the special figure 2 variable display game, since there are few types of the latter half variation, the variation pattern random number 1 is not used to select the latter half variation group, and only the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are used to determine the variation pattern.

[2-byte sorting process]
FIG. 58 shows the 2-byte allocation process (step Y455) in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution processing, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second-half variation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table, since distribution is not necessary, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

If the first data in the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (
(Step Y507) The 2-byte allocation process is ended. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variation group table is not the code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variation group table is acquired (step Y5).
03).

Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random number value. Is smaller than "0" (step Y505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503, and the subsequent processes are performed. To do. That is, in step Y503, the distribution value defined next in the variable group selection table is acquired, and then in step Y505 the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random value, and a new random value is added. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). And
It is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

In the step Y505, the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y).
505; Y) until it is determined. As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table. When it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (step Y507), and the 2-byte sorting process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 59 shows the distribution processing (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation pattern setting processing and special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing. In the distribution process, the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table (based on the variation pattern random number 3 ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

In this distribution processing, first, the data at the beginning of the prepared second-half fluctuation selection table (selection table) and first-half fluctuation selection table (selection table) has no distribution (that is, "
0") is checked (step Y511). Here, like the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one of the latter half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not have a distribution table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

If the first data of the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not the code without distribution (step Y512; N), the one distribution value initially defined in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step Y513).

Next, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (the value of the variable pattern random number 2 or the variable pattern random number 3) to calculate a new random number value (step Y514), the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the generated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y515;
N) updates the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), shifts the processing to step Y513, and performs the subsequent processing.

That is, in step Y513, the distribution value defined next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, and then in step Y515 the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value. , Further, a new random number value is calculated (step Y514).
.. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y).
515).

In step Y515, the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515).
515; it is executed until it is determined as Y). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one of the second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table. Then, in step Y515,
If it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step Y517), and the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 60 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247 and Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551). If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), the change of the special figure 1 is performed. The random number storage area for the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (for the number of holding 1) is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of special figure 2 are cleared (step Y553).

Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558).
), the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state and the second specific game state is a deviation or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60000 ms) excluding the time that can be measured is calculated as the added value by using the number of times of repetition, which is the number of times that the specified time (60000 ms here) is measured. It is supposed to be done.

After that, it is determined whether the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y560). If the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. When the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step Y560; N), that is, when the information of special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step Y561). The long variation is a variation pattern that is set when the result is off or a small hit in the normal game state and the second specific game state in the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern. ..

If it is not the start of the long fluctuation of special figure 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and step Y564.
Move to. If the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

Then prepare the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (step Y564).
, Prepare a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the latter half variation number (step Y565), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y566). Next, it is determined whether the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y567), and if the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step Y567; N).
Ends the variation start information setting process. When the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569). ), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y570), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
Based on the first start-up memory stored in the first start-up storage means, the game control device 100 provides the result and the change mode information of the first change-display game (special figure 1 change-display game) to the start of the first change-display game. It constitutes a first determining means that can be determined previously. In addition, the game control device 100,
A predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 37, and the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) are extracted based on the predetermined random number. It constitutes a second determining means that can be determined before the start of the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

From the above, the first start winning hole 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball shot to one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning hole 37 is shot to the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is placed at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information on the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is more than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be long.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information on the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. It should be noted that by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes second variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

In addition, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determining means and the result and variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determining means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and when the measurement time has passed the variation time, It constitutes a measuring means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state and the second specific game state is a marginal or small hit, a long variation is set for a very long variation time, but in this case, The information about the variation time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, but a command indicating only a long variation may be transmitted. In the case of long variation, it is sufficient to simply perform variable display and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts variable display based on the reception of the command of long variation. The variation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when the variation time is over, and the production control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, the control load on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[High probability change count update process]
FIG. 61 shows the high-probability-variation-number-of-times updating process (steps Y257 and Y268) in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation start process and Toku-zu 2 variation start process. In this high-probability-variation-number updating process, first, it is determined whether the high-probability is in progress (step Y581), and when it is not in the high-probability (step Y581; N), the high-probability variation number updating process is ended. If there is a high probability (
In step Y581; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations that manages the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high-probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and it is determined whether the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y581; Step Y583).

When the number of times of high probability variation is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, when the high probability state continues, the updating process of number of high probability variation is ended. Further, when the number of times of high probability fluctuation is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when the high probability state is ended, a signal regarding the high probability state and the end of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, it is set to turn off the two big hit signals. Further, the signals regarding the high probability state and the end of time saving are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

Further, a low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and a special figure low probability and no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y58).
7). Then, the final variation flag corresponding to the symbol to start varying and the gaming state to end (first specific gaming state or second specific gaming state) is set (step Y588), and the probability variation operating area passing information area is cleared (step (Y589), and ends the high-probability fluctuation number update processing. The information in the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared in addition to this processing when the result is a big hit in the processing during the display of Toku-zu 1 and the processing during the display of Toku-zu, or when the power of the game machine is turned on. Become.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the high-probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state is finished, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display are set. Since the games can be executed at the same time, the high-probability fluctuation number update processing for managing the number of times of the high-probability state is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. If the gaming machine does not execute the other special figure fluctuation display game while one special figure fluctuation display game is being executed as in the conventional case, the probability state is set by the end of the predetermined number of special figure fluctuation display games. There is no problem if you change to a low probability state. However, like the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, the probability state is set to the low probability at the end of the predetermined number of special figure variable display games. If the state is changed to the state, the determination is made in a high probability state even in the other special figure variation display game started during the execution of the one special figure variation display game, and the high probability is exceeded for a predetermined number of times or more. The game can be executed in this state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be simultaneously executed like the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one special figure variable display game, which is the predetermined number of times, is performed in a high probability state. After the determination, it is necessary to keep the low probability state until the start of the other special figure variation display game, and here, immediately after finishing the processing at the start for one special figure variation display game which is the predetermined number of times. It is possible to change to a low probability state.

In this way, since the high-probability fluctuation number update processing is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, for the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state, the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The display is already in a low probability state. Therefore, if another process performs a process while referring to the actual probability state during the variable display of the special figure variable display game, the process may be performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the final variation flag is set so that the special figure variation display game can be treated as a game executed in a high probability state. The final fluctuation flag is
Which of the first special game state and the second special game state is the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery has been performed, and which of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game It contains the information that can determine. In the present embodiment, the final variation flag for the final special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the first specific game state is referred to as the first final variation flag,
The final variation flag for the final special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the second specific gaming state is referred to as a second final variation flag.

[Special figure 1 processing transition setting processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 62, the special figure 1 changing process in the special figure 1 normal process shift setting process (step Y21
6) is shown. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal relating to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1
An initial value (for example, 100 ms) of a blinking cycle timer of the display 51 is set (step Y606). Furthermore, the initial value is set in the symbol number area during fluctuation of special figure 1 (step Y60
7), the special figure 1 changing process shift setting process is ended.

The initial value to be set in the symbol number area during fluctuation of special figure 1 is 0, so that the variable display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 processing transition setting processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 63, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process in the special figure 2 normal process (step Y23
0) was shown. In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal relating to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2
An initial value (for example, 100 ms) of a blinking cycle timer of the display device 52 is set (step Y616). Furthermore, the initial value is set in the symbol number area during fluctuation of special figure 2 (step Y61
7), the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is ended.

The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variable symbol number area is 0, which allows the variable display to be started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

In addition, when starting the variable display on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is assumed that all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any of the result modes, or if there is a segment that is not used in any of the result modes, at least the variable display is started from the state of lighting the segment. It may be done. Also, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always turned on every time. In addition, special figure 1
The lighting mode when the display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 start changing may be the same or different.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 64, the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above.
showed that. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area to prepare (step Y622), and the effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step Y623).

Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, so when the fluctuation is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. ..

Then, it is determined whether it is the final variation of the first specific game state (step Y626). When the special figure 1 variation display game is the final variation of the first specific game state, the first final variation flag of the special figure 1 is set. Then, if it is not the final fluctuation of the first specific game state (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627).
, Step Y629. If it is the final fluctuation of the first specific game state (step Y626; Y), the display time at the final fluctuation is set (step Y628), and step Y
Move to 629. In addition, as the display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 variable display game set here, when it is not the final fluctuation of the first specific game state, 600 ms in the case of failure,
The display time is set to 2000 ms for the big hit and 136 ms for the small hit. In the case of the final fluctuation of the first specific game state, the display time of 7,000 ms is set regardless of the result.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y629). When Toku-zu 1 is out of alignment (step Y629; Y)
Shifts to step Y644. If the special map 1 is not out of alignment (step Y629;
N), that is, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

If the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y630; N), the process proceeds to step Y640. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y
630; Y) determines whether or not the special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (step Y631). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game has a special result, and the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the deviation result. It should be noted that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 2 (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y631; N), the symbol confirmation number output count is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the display time of the special figure 1 set as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are finished at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), a command is loaded from the special figure 2 command area to prepare (step Y635), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y636). ). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y640), and whether it is a special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. In addition, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (
Step Y641; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step Y642), and special figure 1 special winning opening information Information is loaded from the area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645).
, The process of displaying the special figure 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 65, the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above.
showed that. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area to prepare (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is executed. Perform (step Y653).

Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y655). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the final variation of the first specific game state (step Y656). If the special figure 2 variation display game is the final variation of the first specific game state, the first final variation flag of special figure 2 is set.

Then, if it is not the final fluctuation of the first specific game state (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. If it is the final fluctuation of the first specific game state (step Y656; Y), the display time at the final fluctuation is set (step Y658), and the process proceeds to step Y659. In addition,
As the display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 variable display game set here, if it is not the final variation of the first specific game state, 600 ms regardless of the result, if it is the final variation of the first specific game state Is set to a display time of 7,000 ms regardless of the result.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y659). Special map 2 is out of alignment (step Y659; Y)
Moves to step Y674. If the special map 2 is not out of alignment (step Y659;
N), that is, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

If the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y660; N), the process proceeds to step Y670. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y
660; Y) determines whether or not the special figure 1 display is being processed (step Y661). In other words, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the deviation result based on the special figure 2 variable display game having a special result. It should be noted that the special display 1 variable display game is also subject to forced stop even when the variable display has already finished variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended.

When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 1 (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. If the special figure 1 is not being displayed (step Y661; N), the number of times of symbol determination output is incremented by 1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), a command is loaded from the special figure 1 command area to prepare (step Y665), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y666). ). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y670), and whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. Also, if the special figure 2 is not a small hit (
Step Y671; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step Y672), and special figure 2 large winning opening information Information is loaded from the area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675).
, The process of displaying the special figure 2 ends.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In this special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" relating to the special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y681), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step Y684). ), the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display transition process setting process 1]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" relating to the special figure 2 displaying process is set (step Y691), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y694). ), the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure 1 in-display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y701), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, the signal relating to the fluctuation end of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

Up to this point, the process is the same as that of the special figure 1 during-display process shift setting process 1 described above, and hereinafter, the information for setting the result of deviation is set. First, the shift stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, clear the special prize 1 big winning a prize opening information territory (step Y707), small hitting flag 1
The deviation information is saved in the area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y709). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), and the special figure 1 stop symbol area is deviated to save the stop symbol number (step Y7).
11), the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is ended.

[Special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 69 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" relating to the special figure 2 displaying process is set (step Y721), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal relating to the fluctuation end of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y724).

Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 1, and hereinafter, the information for setting the result of deviation is set. First, the shift stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, clear the special prize 2 big winning a prize opening information territory (step Y727), small hitting flag 2
The deviation information is saved in the area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step Y729). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y730), and the deviation stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y7).
31), the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 is ended.

With the above-described processing of FIGS. 64 to 69, when one special figure variation display game has a special result, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly discontinued and the first end control processing is performed, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. On the basis of this, the second ending control processing is performed in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the result.

From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game execution when performing the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). When the second variation display game (execution control 2 variation display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game performing the execution control. Can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means executes the first variable display game execution control means when executing the second variable display game execution control. When the first variable display game under control has a special result, the second variable display game under execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result. As a result, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped due to the outlier result, so that a problem does not occur even when simultaneous variation is performed. Can be

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
70 and 71, the special figure 1 displaying process in the special figure 1 game process described above (step Y).
110). In this special figure 1 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (
(Step Y751), the small hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y752).

Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the special figure 1 variation start processing is loaded (step Y753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y).
755; N) moves to step Y777. If it is a big hit (step Y7
55; Y) is a test signal (for example, a condition device operating signal is ON, a character continuous operation device operating signal is on, a special symbol 1) related to the start of the big hit (special part 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game.
The hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Then, a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal variation notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state. After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y759), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the present embodiment, 12, 5 or 2).
Is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area to be prepared (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y7).
63). After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of this embodiment,
At step Y766, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening information (for example, 100 ms)
Is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step Y769), and the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y7).
70), save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y771). Further, clear the lower prize hole number area for illegal prizes (step Y772),
Save the flag outside fraudulent monitoring period in the lower major prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y7
73), and proceeds to step Y774.

Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y774), and the game number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). Further, fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the processing during the display of special figure 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit at step Y755 (step Y755; N),
That is, when the big hit flag 1 is the out-of-range information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is the small hit (small hit information) (step Y777). Then, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the final change (step Y778).
). The final variation here includes both the first final variation and the second final variation. That is, the first
The predetermined number of times (here, 1
The 00th) special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time), and the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery in the first or second specific game state has been performed is being executed, This is the last special map variation display game in which a lottery was conducted in a high probability state.

If it is not the final fluctuation (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. If it is the final variation (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y780). And
The probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored (step Y78).
1) Clear the left-handing instruction notification flag and the final variation flag (step Y782). By clearing the left-handing instruction notification flag, the left-handing instruction notification command is set in the next special processing of FIG. Note that the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final fluctuation, but may be cleared in the case of the second final fluctuation.

Then, load the command from the hit symbol command area and prepare (step Y783).
, Production command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785) and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y78).
6), it is determined whether the first specific game state (step Y787).

If it is not in the first specific game state (step Y787; N), the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first gaming state display portion 77 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided.

On the other hand, in the case of the first specific game state (step Y787; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display portion 77 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given.

After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y792). If it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (step Y792; Y).
Clears the number of fraudulent winning a prize special prize area (step Y793), saves the flag outside fraud monitoring period in the flag fraud supervising period flag area (step Y794), and step Y7
Move to 97. In addition, when it is not the small hit which opens the upper special winning a prize (step Y792; N
), that is, in the case of a small hit for opening the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39),
The lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y795), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and step Y797.
Move to. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing (step Y79
7) is performed, and the process of displaying the special map 1 is terminated.

When it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not the small hit (step Y777; N), it is determined whether the change is final (step Y798). The final variation here also includes both the first final variation and the second final variation. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state.

If it is not the final fluctuation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. If it is the final variation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y800). And
The probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored (step Y80).
1) Clear the left-handing instruction notification flag and the final variation flag (step Y802). Note that the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final fluctuation, but may be cleared in the case of the second final fluctuation.

Next, during the small hit of special figure 2, that is, the second based on the small hit generated in the variable display game of special figure 2
It is determined whether it is in the special game state (step Y803). When it is in the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y803; Y), it moves to step Y806. As a result, the state of instructing the right stroke is maintained. In addition, when the small hit of special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y803; N),
The signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y804), and the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y805). After that, the change of special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806), special figure 1 normal processing shift setting processing 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 displaying process is ended. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
72 and 73, the special figure 2 displaying process in the special figure 2 game process described above (step Y).
141). The special figure 2 displaying process is the same process as the special figure 1 displaying process described above for the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and if it is not a big hit (step Y).
815; N) moves to step Y837. If it is a big hit (step Y8
15; Y) is a test signal (for example, a condition device operating signal is ON, a character continuous operation device operating signal is on, a special symbol 2) related to the start of the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 big hit).
The hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step Y817), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal variation notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state. After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y819), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the present embodiment, 12, 5 or 2).
Is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area and prepared (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y8).
23). Then, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of this embodiment,
At step Y826, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the winning opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening information (for example, 100 ms)
Is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step Y829), and the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y8).
30), the flag outside fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y831). Furthermore, clear the lower major winning opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y832),
Save the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area in the lower special prize opening (step Y8
33) and the process proceeds to step Y834.

Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834), and the game number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Further, fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing (step Y836) is performed, and the processing of displaying special figure 2 ends.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit at step Y815 (step Y815; N),
That is, when the big hit flag 2 is the out-of-range information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is the small hit (small hit information) (step Y837). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the final change (step Y838).
). The final variation here includes both the first final variation and the second final variation. That is, the first
The predetermined number of times (here, 1
The 00th) special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time), and the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery in the first or second specific game state has been performed is being executed, This is the last special map variation display game in which a lottery was conducted in a high probability state.

If it is not the final fluctuation (step Y838; N), the process proceeds to step Y843. If it is the final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y840). And
The probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored (step Y84).
1) Clear the left-handing instruction notification flag and the final variation flag (step Y842). By clearing the left-handing instruction notification flag, the left-handing instruction notification command is set in the next special processing of FIG. Note that the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final fluctuation, but may be cleared in the case of the second final fluctuation.

After that, the command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y843).
, Production command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y84).
6), it is determined whether the first specific game state (step Y847).

If it is not in the first specific game state (step Y847; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first gaming state display portion 77 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided.

On the other hand, in the case of the first specific game state (step Y847; Y), the signal relating to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display portion 77 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given.

After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y852). When it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (step Y852; Y).
Clears the special winning opening fraudulent prize number area (step Y853), saves the fraud monitoring outside period flag in the upper special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and proceeds to step Y8.
Move to 57. In addition, when it is not the small hit which opens the upper special winning a prize (step Y852; N
), that is, in the case of a small hit for opening the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39),
The lower special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared (step Y855), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and step Y857 is set.
Move to. Then, the special figure 2 small hit small fanfare processing transition setting processing (step Y85
7) is performed, and the process of displaying the special map 2 ends.

When it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not the small hit (step Y837; N), it is determined whether the change is final (step Y858). The final variation here also includes both the first final variation and the second final variation. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state. If it is not the final fluctuation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. If it is the final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y861), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y862). Note that the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final fluctuation, but may be cleared in the case of the second final fluctuation.

Next, during the small hit of special figure 1, that is, the second based on the small hit generated in the variable display game of special figure 1
It is determined whether it is in the special game state (step Y863). If the small hit of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y863; Y), the process proceeds to step Y866. As a result, the state of instructing the right stroke is maintained. In addition, when the small hit of special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y863; N),
The signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y865). After that, the change of special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866), special figure 2 normal processing shift setting processing 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 displaying processing is ended. ..

That is, the first special game in which the game control device 100 causes the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result. Second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable prize winning device is opened without operating the condition device on the basis of the generating means and the second special result of the variable display game. To make.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 74 shows the fanfares in the above-mentioned special figure 1 displaying process and special figure 2 displaying process.
The details of the process shift setting process during the interval (steps Y776, Y836) will be described. In this fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing, first, a signal relating to the start of a big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y8).
71). Here, the jackpot 1 signal output in the jackpot or the jackpot is set to ON. Next, the signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the variation time shortening state of the special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal O
FF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF,
Special symbol 2 Set the fluctuation time reduction state signal to OFF.

After that, the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is set. The special figure low probability, no time saving flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state The high probability variation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high-probability state and the time saving state are ended, and the low-probability state and the normal state are set.

Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the final variation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Although either the first final variation flag or the second final variation flag is set in the final variation flag area, whichever is set, it is cleared. Further, the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
880), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y88).
1).

After that, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area storing the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation number area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing is ended. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, all the information regarding the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is cleared.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 75 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 displaying process. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, first, “7” relating to small hit fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and the signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by big hit or small hit is O
Set to N. Further, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

Then, the small hit information is saved in the special drawing status information (step Y896), and the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897).
The small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 displaying process. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, first, "7" relating to small hit fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and the signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by big hit or small hit is O
Set to N. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

Then, the small hit information is saved in the special drawing status information (step Y906), and the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907).
The small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing ends.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
FIG. 77 shows fanfares in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing.
The processing during the interval (steps Y111 and Y142) is shown. In this fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y95).
1) Prepare the special winning opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds (step Y
952) and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y953).

Next, a big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit medium processing control pointer area (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. Here, the upper V opening corresponds. Further, in the case of performing one continuous opening in one round, the jackpot operation end value of 2 is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Then, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is either 200 ms or 25000 ms, for example.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958). If it is the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y959). ), the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. Yes (step Y962).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a round in which the upper special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is opened (step Y963). In the case of a round of opening the special winning opening (step Y963; Y)
Performs the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 (step Y964), and the fanfare/
Processing ends during the interval. If it is not the round for opening the special winning opening (step Y963; N), the special winning opening opening processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare/interval processing is ended.

[Transition setting process 1 during the process of opening the special winning opening]
FIG. 78 shows the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 (step Y964) in the above-mentioned fanfare/interval process. This special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1
In the first step, first, the signal related to the opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area in order to open the opening/closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. Clear the winning prize count (step Y973)

Next, it is determined whether it is the operation round of the lever solenoid (step Y974). The lever solenoid operation round is to operate the lever solenoid 38f to operate the lever member 38i.
In the present embodiment, and is only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y974; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y975), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1
To finish. As a result, the data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. If it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y974; N), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y976), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended. In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 38f is not operated. In this embodiment, this process is not performed because the first special variation winning device 38 is not opened except for the lever solenoid operation round.

[Prize winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 79 shows the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 (step Y965) in the above-mentioned fanfare/interval process. This special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2
In the first step, first, the signal related to the opening of the lower special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening/closing door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count number is cleared (step Y983), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
FIG. 80 shows the special winning opening opening process (steps Y112 and Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the process of opening the special winning opening, first, the process control pointer during the big hit is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether the loaded value is the big hit operation end value (here, 2) or more (step Y1002).

If the loaded value is not greater than or equal to the jackpot operation end value (here, 2) (step Y1002)
;N) performs the big hit operation shift setting process (step Y1003), updates the big hit mid-process control pointer by +1 (step Y1004), and ends the special winning opening open process. In this case, opening/closing is performed during one round, and the opening/closing mode of the special variation winning device is set according to the updated big hit mid-process control pointer.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (here, 2) (step Y1)
002; Y) compares the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area to determine whether or not the current round is the final round (
Step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between the rounds is prepared (step Y1006).
) And effect command setting processing (step Y1008). In the case of the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008). I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009),
As the processing number, 5 for the special winning opening remaining ball processing is set (step Y1010). As the remaining sphere processing time, 1300 ms or 1700 ms is set. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1011).

If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1013). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1).
014), the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y10).
15).

Then, save the off data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1
016), the process of opening the special winning opening is ended. In step Y1016, OFF data is set for both the upper special winning opening solenoid and the lower special winning opening solenoid, and the closing processing is performed for all the special winning openings.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
In FIG. 81, the jackpot operation transition setting process (step Y) in the above-described process for opening the special winning opening.
1004). In the big hit operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit mid process control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, 0
Performs branch processing assuming that the number is even.

If the value of the mid-big hit processing control pointer is an even number in step Y1021, the wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 2700 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. Note that step Y1023
Then, the OFF data is set for both the upper special winning opening solenoid and the lower special winning opening solenoid, and the closing processing is performed for any of the special winning openings.

On the other hand, if the value of the mid-hit processing control pointer is odd in step Y1021, the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, when the value of the mid-hit processing control pointer is 1, 25000 ms is set as the special winning opening opening time. Next, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, only the special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) repeats opening and closing during one round, so in step Y1024, the on data is saved for the upper winning opening solenoid. doing. Of course, depending on the settings of the game machine, the opening and closing of the lower special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) may be repeated in one round.

After that, it is determined whether or not it is the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026), and if it is the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( (Step Y1027), and ends the big hit movement transition setting process. In addition, special figure 1
If it is not the big hit (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit operation transition setting process is ended. With the above processing, it is possible to repeatedly open and close the special winning opening in one round.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
FIG. 82 shows the special winning opening remaining ball processing (steps Y113 and Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y1041)
..

When the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y
1041; N) saves the signal related to the end of opening the special winning opening in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds of this time is set (step Y1043), and the processing number 3 for fanfare/interval processing is set (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the passage of the remaining ball processing time, and from the passage of the remaining ball processing time to the passage of the interval time. For example, in the case of the lower long opening, the remaining sphere processing time of 1700 ms and the interval time of 300 ms are set, so the interval period is 2000 ms, and the interval effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like during this interval period.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1)
041; Y) performs a big hit end process transition setting process (step Y1045), sets an ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y1046), and uses a special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit as a process number. Set 6 for end processing (step Y1
047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (
(Step Y1050), the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ( (Step Y1052), the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special game state is the period from the end of the final round to the passage of the remaining ball processing time, and further from the passage of the remaining ball processing time to the passage of the ending time. For example, if the lower long opening is set, the remaining ball processing time of 1700 ms and the ending time of 2300 ms are set, so the ending period is 40
00 ms, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 or the like during this ending period.

[Big hit end process transition setting process]
FIG. 83 shows the big hit ending process shift setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described special winning opening remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071).
.. Here, the special electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is OFF and the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is OFF
Set to.

Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information of the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), the information on the upper limit number of rounds area that stores the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

Then, the information of the round number upper limit value information area that stores the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the special winning opening opening information area that stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the mid-big hit control pointer area for setting the opening/closing mode of the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit ending process transition setting process is ended.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
84. In FIG. 84, the special figure 1 big hit end process in the special figure 1 game process described above (step Y11).
4) is shown. In this special figure 1 big hit end processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is probability variation operating area passage information set when a game ball flows into the probability variation operating area 38h (step Y1101).
). When there is no probability variation operation area passage information (step Y1101; N), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step Y1102), and the process proceeds to step Y1104. In this case, the high probability state does not occur and the normal gaming state occurs. In addition, if there is probability variation operating area passage information (
In step Y1101; Y), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step Y1103), and the process proceeds to step Y1104. In this case, it is the high probability state and the time saving state and the first specific game state. That is, in the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h regardless of the big hit symbol or the game state, the first specific game state is entered.

Next, "0" is set as the process number related to the special process 1 special process (step Y1104),
The process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1105). Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1106).
.. Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. After that, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

Next, save the number of lights off in the round LED pointer area (step Y1108),
Save the flag during fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper special winning opening (step Y11
09), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y1110), and the special figure status region is cleared (step Y1111). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 is displayed, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y11).
12), the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

The special figure variation display game can be started for both special figure 1 and special figure 2 by performing the special figure 1 big hit end process, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variable display game. Will be able to start first. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1112,
The start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

That is, in the game control device 100, after the special game state ends, the second variable display game execution control means sets the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing standby unit is provided to prevent the processing related to the start of the two-variable display game from being brought into an executable state.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
85. In FIG. 85, the special figure 2 jackpot end process in the special figure 2 game process described above (step Y14).
5) is shown. In this special figure 2 big hit end processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is probability variation operating area passage information set when a game ball flows into the probability variation operating area 38h (step Y1121).
). When there is no probability variation operation area passage information (step Y1121; N), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step Y1125), and the process proceeds to step Y1126. In this case, the high probability state does not occur and the normal gaming state occurs. In addition, if there is probability variation operating area passage information (
Step Y1121; Y) determines whether or not it is a hit in the special figure 2 variable display game started in the first specific game state (step Y1122).

When it is a hit in the special figure 2 variable display game started in the first specific game state (step Y
1122; Y), that is, in the case where the special display 2 variable display game is the main variable special drawing, the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step Y1124), and the process proceeds to step Y1126. In this case, it is the high probability state and the time saving state and the first specific game state. If the special figure 2 variable display game started in the first specific game state is not hit (step Y1122; N), that is, if the special figure 2 variable display game is not the main variable special figure, The big hit end setting process 3 is performed (step Y1123), and the process proceeds to step Y1126. In this case, it is a high probability state, but is not a time saving state but a second specific game state. That is, regardless of the big hit symbol, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h, the probability state is high, but if it is a hit in the main fluctuation special map, it becomes a time saving state, and it must be a hit in the main fluctuation special map. For example, it is designed not to shorten the working hours.

Next, "0" is set as the process number related to the special process 2 ordinary process (step Y1126),
The processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1127). Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1128).
.. Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1129). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

Next, save the number of lights off in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130),
Save the flag during fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper special winning opening (step Y11
31), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1133), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is ended. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 is displayed, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 86 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1103 and 1124) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of the high-probability state and the time saving state (the state of shortening the variation time of the special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1141). Here, the two big hit signals are set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1142). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal ON
Set to. After that, save the high probability and time saving flags in the special figure game mode flag area (
(Step Y1143), the initial value (here, 100) is saved in the high probability variation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state (step Y1144).

Next, the number with high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1145), and the signal relating to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1146).
Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. After that, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1147), the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step Y1148), and the jackpot end setting process is performed. Complete 1. By this processing, the high probability state and the time saving state are set, and the first specific game state is set.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 87 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1102 and 1125) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the low probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
151). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to OFF.

Next, the signal related to the start of the low probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to OFF. Then, the low probability and no time saving flags are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153).

Next, the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1154), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155).
Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. After that, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156), the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1157), and the jackpot end setting process is performed. Two
To finish. By this processing, there is a low probability state and there is no time saving, and a normal game state is set.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 88 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
23). In this jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal related to the start of the high probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the two big hit signals are set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal related to the start of the high probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal O
Set to N, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened status signal and special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened status signal O
Set to FF. After that, the high probability and no time saving flags are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1163), and an initial value () is set in the high probability variation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state. Here, 100 is saved (step Y11)
64).

Next, the number with a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1165), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1166).
Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. After that, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1167), the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1168), and the jackpot end setting process is performed. Three
To finish. By this processing, there is a high probability state and there is no reduction in time, and the second specific game state is entered.

Through the above processing, it is possible to set the specific game state which is a high probability state until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times after the end of the first special game state. That is, the game control device 10
0 constitutes a specific game state generation means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game will be a special result is higher than that in the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Further, the specific game state generating means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game will be the first special result for a predetermined period as the specific game state, compared to the normal state.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (steps Y115, Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in this small hit fanfare medium processing, first, branching is performed according to an open pattern (step Y1).
201).

When the opening pattern is small hit 1 in step Y1201, a small hit opening during opening command of the lower special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared (step Y1202), and effect command setting processing is performed ( Step Y1203). Next, 8 is set as the processing number for the small hitting process (step Y1204), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

After that, the small hit opening time 1 (here, 48 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. And save the lower winning a prize mouth on data in the winning a prize solenoid output data area (
Then, the process proceeds to step Y1208) and step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is the small hit 2 in step Y1201, the small big opening command for opening the lower special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared (step Y1209).
, Production command setting processing is performed (step Y1210). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1211), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1212).

Then, the small hit opening time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is a small hit 3 at step Y1201, a small hit opening command for opening the upper special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step Y1216).
, Production command setting processing is performed (step Y1217). Then, 8 is set as the processing number for the small hitting process (step Y1218), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

After that, the small hit opening time 3 (1200 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is small hit 4 in step Y1201, a small hit opening command for opening the upper special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step Y1223).
, Production command setting processing is performed (step Y1224). Then, 8 is set as the processing number for the processing during the small hit (step Y1225), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1226).

After that, the small hit opening time 4 (here 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After processing according to these types of small hits, clear the special winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening (
(Step Y1230), and ends the small hit fanfare process.

[Processing during small hits]
FIG. 90 shows a small hitting process (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this small hitting process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y12).
42). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

When the open pattern is the small hit 1 in step Y1243, the small hit remaining ball processing 9 is set as the processing number (step Y1244), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step S1). Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). The hitting process is ended.

When the open pattern is the small hit 2 in step Y1243, the small hit remaining ball processing 9 is set as the processing number (step Y1248), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1248). Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). The hitting process is ended.

When the open pattern is the small hit 3 or 4 in step Y1243, the small hit remaining ball processing 9 is set as the processing number (step Y1252), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y1253). And small hit remaining ball processing time 3
(Here 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254).
), save the off data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255).
), the small hit medium processing is ended.

In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, OFF data is set for both the upper special winning opening solenoid and the lower special winning opening solenoid, and a process of closing any big winning opening is performed.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
FIG. 91 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117 and Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271). In the case of the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), 10 which is related to the small hit end processing of special figure 1 is set as the process number (
(Step Y1272), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y).
1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

If it is not the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 which is related to the special figure 2 small hit process is set as the process number (step Y1275), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277),
The process moves to step Y1278.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, clear the special winning opening count area (step Y127
9) The small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Special drawing 1 small hit end processing]
In FIG. 92, the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y11) in the special figure 1 game process described above.
8) is shown. In the special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 1 normal process is set as a process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y1304), the off number is saved in the round LED pointer region (step Y1305), and the special figure status region is cleared (step Y1304). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither of them is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific game state (step Y1307), and if it is the first specific game state (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. Also, the first
When it is not in the specific game state (step Y1307; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310). ), the special figure 1 small hit end processing ends. Here too, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed. The special display 2 variable display game is processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 93 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y14) in the special figure 2 game process described above.
9) is shown. In the special figure 2 small hit ending process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as a process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning port fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y13).
35). After that, the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y13).
36), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 is displayed, which indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific game state (step Y1338), and if it is the first specific game state (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hitting end processing is ended. In addition, when it is not the 1st specific game state (step Y1338; N), the signal regarding the left hit instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hitting end processing is ended.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 94 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y120 and Y153) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device 51 and the special symbol 2 display device 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol fluctuation control process, first, it is checked whether the fluctuation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is changing (step Y1401).

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is changing (step Y1402; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the symbol to be controlled Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

When the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), step Y140
Go to 8. Moreover, when the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the blink control timer initial value (here, 100 ms) is saved in the control target blink control timer area (step Y1406), and the control target symbol is set. The variable symbol number related to is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). After that, save the acquired display data in the target segment area (
(Step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process ends.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410).
), save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step Y1411),
The symbol variation control process ends. As a result, of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled.

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 95 shows the segment LED editing process (step X) in the above timer interrupt process.
112). In this segment LED editing process, a round display that displays the storage display unit 54 provided in the collective display device 50 and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is opened and closed). Part 60, the first game state display unit 77 that informs the player of the left-handed (normal hit) and right-handed hits that are advantageous to the player, Segment L that constitutes the probability display unit 78 for notification
Make settings related to ED driving.

In this segment LED editing process, first, a special figure 1 reserved number table in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is acquired, and a segment is created. Save in the area (step X602). Next, the round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 is defined is set (step X603), the display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X604).

Then, the gaming state display table 1 in which the display mode on the probability display section 78 is specified is set (
(Step X605), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (Step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display section 77 is defined is set (step X607), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X608), and the segment LED edit processing ends.

[Unauthorized magnet monitoring process]
In FIG. 96, magnet irregularity monitoring processing in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (step X113)
showed that. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, presence/absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start/end of fraud notification is set.

In this magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 outputs the third input port 12
It is determined from the state of the detection signal taken in 4 (input port 3) whether the magnetic sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is on, that is, the state in which abnormal magnetism is detected (step X6).
11). If the magnetic sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, it is determined whether the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 and the timer is up. The determination is made (step X613).

If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X
614), the magnet irregularity notification timer initial value (here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (step X615). Then, a command for notifying magnet fraud is prepared (step X616), and a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X6).
17) It is determined whether the prepared magnet irregularity flag matches the value of the magnet irregularity flag area (step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611;
N), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and if the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0-
1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (step X620).
Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

Then, if the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. When the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the injustice notification period ends or the injustice notification occurs from the beginning. If not, prepare a command for ending the magnet irregularity notification (step X621).
). Furthermore, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622).
Then, it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623).

Then, when the prepared magnet irregularity flag matches the value of the magnet irregularity flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet irregularity monitoring process is ended. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet irregularity flag is saved in the magnet irregularity flag area (step X624), effect command setting processing is performed (step X625), and the magnet irregularity monitoring processing ends. To do.

[Board radio frequency monitoring process]
In FIG. 97, the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing (step X114
)showed that. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set.

In this board radio wave irregularity monitoring process, first, the board radio wave sensor 62 outputs the proximity I/F 12
From the state of the detection signal taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via 1a, it is determined whether or not the panel radio sensor 62 is on, that is, the state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (
Step X631). When the board radio sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave irregularity notification timer initial value (here, 60000 ms)
Is saved in the radio irregularity notification timer area (step X632).

Then, a board radio wave irregularity notification command is prepared (step X633), a board radio wave irregularity flag is prepared as a board radio wave irregularity flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag becomes a value in the board radio wave irregularity flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, in the case of radio fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is updated by -1 if not 0 ( Step X635). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is 0 (step X63).
6).

When the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the board radio frequency irregularity monitoring process ends. Also, when the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the injustice notification period has ended or the injustice notification has been issued from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the board radio wave irregularity notification (step X637), prepare a board radio wave irregularity release flag as a board radio wave irregularity flag (step X638), and prepare the board radio wave irregularity flag. It is determined whether the value matches the value of the illegal flag area (step X63
9).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing is ended. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step X640), effect command setting processing is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave irregularity monitoring is performed. The process ends.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 98 shows an external information editing process (step X115) in the above timer interrupt process.
showed that. In the external information editing processing, payout command transmission processing (step X105), winning opening switch/state monitoring processing (step X108), magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X113)
, A process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement center internal management device or a test shooting test device based on the monitoring result of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) and setting it in the output buffer And so on.

In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701). If no glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12 ) It is determined whether a release error is occurring (step X702).
When the main frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the OFF data of the security signal is set to the external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y), the main frame (
Front frame 12) When an opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), and the gaming machine error status signal Save the ON data in the test signal output data area (step X706).
, And proceeds to step X707. That is, the information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as external information.

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is 0
Is set to.

When the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N),
That is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), is the occurrence of frame radio wave fraud, which is detection of an abnormal radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12? Is determined (step X709).

When frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (step X709; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of switch connector is occurring (step X71).
1). Then, when the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch error is occurring (step X
711; Y) saves the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step X712), and proceeds to step X713.

Then, the illegal magnet is being generated (step X713; Y), and the board radio wave is being generated (step X7).
14; Y), the special winning opening fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), and the special figure 2 abnormal variation is occurring (step X716; Y), the on-data of the security signal is output as external information. Save in the data area (step X718), save ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step X719), step X7
Move to 20. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 occur, the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and step X72.
Move to 0.

Then, a starting opening 1 signal editing process (step X720) for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning opening 36 and a starting opening 2 signal editing process (step X721) for editing the winning signal to the second starting winning opening 37 are performed. To do. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination number signal editing process for setting information on the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process ends.

[Starting port 1 signal editing process]
In FIG. 99, the starting port 1 signal editing process (step X72) in the above-mentioned external information editing process is performed.
0) was shown. In this starting port 1 signal editing process, first, the starting port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0.
If not, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the starting opening 1 signal output frequency is 0 (step X733).
).

If the number of times the start port 1 signal is output is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1 signal is output.
The signal output count is updated by -1 (step X734), and the initial value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is saved in the starting port 1 signal output control timer region (step X735). The initial value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is the time obtained by adding the on-state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off-state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the starting port signal. (For example, 192 ms). Then, the ON data for turning on the starting opening 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the starting opening 1 signal editing process is ended. Further, when the number of times the starting port 1 signal is output is 0 (step X7
33; Y) saves the OFF data for turning off the starting opening signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738), and ends the starting opening 1 signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N),
It is determined whether or not the start-up one-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section (step X736).
.. The fact that the start-port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the start-port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start-port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on section (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X7.
Move to 37. If the start opening 1 signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step X736; N), the OFF data for turning off the starting opening 1 signal for the external device is set to RWM.
Is saved in the external information output data area of (step X738), and the starting port 1 signal editing process is terminated. The starting port 2 signal editing process (step X7) in the above-mentioned external information editing process is performed.
21) performs the same processing as the starting opening 1 signal editing processing for the starting opening 2 signal.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 100 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X) in the above-mentioned external information editing process.
722). The main prize ball signal editing process is performed by the number of prize balls generated by winning the prize ((
This is a process of outputting a main prize ball signal generated every time the planned payout amount reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) to an external device.

In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal output times is 0 (step X743).
).

If the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (step X743; N), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the ON state of the main prize ball signal (for example, high level).
Time (for example, 128 ms) and off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms)
ms) is added (for example, 192 ms). Then, save the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X
747), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. When the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is 0 (step X743; Y), OFF data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S743). (X748), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X74).
6). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step X746; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design decision frequency signal editing process]
FIG. 101 shows the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step X723) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The symbol fixed number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information relating to the number of times the special figure variable display game is executed.

In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). If the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency that is updated by +1 every time the special symbol variation display game is 0. (Step X753).

Then, when the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal output to the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). This symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value, the time of the ON state (for example, high level) (here, 256 ms) and the OFF state (for example, low level) of the symbol determination frequency signal (here, 300 ms) are added. The time is (556 ms here). Since the game machine of this embodiment can simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the on-state time is set to 256 ms and the off-state time is set to 300 ms.

After that, ON data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is ended. If the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is 0 (step X753; Y), save the OFF data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step (X758), the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N)
Determines whether the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X
756). It is to be noted that the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer being in the output ON section means that the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) or more.
When the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X756; Y)
Shifts the processing to step X757. If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step X756; N), save the OFF data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X7
48), and ends the symbol determination frequency signal editing process.

[Probability change area switch monitoring process]
Next, the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process described above.
Details of 16) will be described. As shown in FIG. 102, in the probability variation operating region switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step X801). The probability variation operating area 38h being valid means that the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operating area switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 7). If the probability variation operating region 38h is not valid (step X801; N), the probability variation operating region switch monitoring process ends. In addition, the probability variation operating area 3
If 8h is valid (step X801; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability variation operating area switch (step X802).

Then, if there is no input to the probability variation operating region switch (step X802; N), the probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is ended. If there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch (step X802; Y), a probability variation operation area passing command is prepared (step X803), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X804). As a result, in the effect control device 300, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the fact that the game ball has flown into the probability variation operation area 38h. afterwards,
Save the probability variation operating area passage information in the probability variation operating area passage information area (step X805),
The probability variation operating area switch monitoring process ends.

[Lever solenoid control processing]
Next, the lever solenoid control process in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (step X117
) Will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 103, in the lever solenoid control processing, first, it is determined whether or not the lever solenoid control pointer is a non-update code (here, -1) (step X821). If the lever solenoid control pointer is a code without update (
A step X821; Y) ends the lever solenoid control processing. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not the non-update code (step X821; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step X822), and the lever solenoid control timer is set to 0.
It is determined whether or not (step X823).

When the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step X823; N), the lever solenoid control process is ended. If the lever solenoid control timer has reached 0 (step X823; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step X8;
24), the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step X825). Then, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step X827), and the output data for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step X828). After that, the probability variation actuation area validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation actuation area validity determination flag area (step X829), and the lever solenoid control process ends.

Through the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated every time a predetermined time elapses, ON/OFF of the lever solenoid 38f is set as shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, and the probability variation operation region is set. The switch 38d is set to be valid or invalid. When the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid control pointer is set to 0, whereby the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalidated. Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

In the above embodiment, the gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game has been described, but the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed simultaneously. It may be a game machine. In this case, one of the special figure variation display games may be preferentially executed, or the special figure variation display game may be executed in the winning order to the starting winning opening. Further, by adjusting the firing force, it is possible to select which of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 is aimed at by the player's intention, but it is possible to aim both starting winning openings at the same time. You can

Further, the high probability state is generated based on the game balls flowing into the probability variation operating region 38h, but it may be determined whether or not to set the high probability state only by the type of the special result. Also,
Although the game value given to the special figure 2 variable display game is changed depending on whether it is the main variation special figure, the game given to the special figure 1 variable display game is also changed depending on whether it is the main variation special figure. You may make it differ in value. The game value to be different is not limited to the presence or absence of a time saving state. For example, the number of rounds in the special game state and the opening mode of the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 may be different. Also, the ease with which the game balls flow into the probability variation operating region 38h may be different. Further, the number of games to be in the time saving state may be different. In addition to this, whether or not to execute a specific video or sound may be different as the game value in the production. Further, a combination of these may be used.

Further, the game value to be given may be determined in consideration of not only the main variation special map but also other conditions. For example, if the special display 1 variation display game is not a main variation special figure, it is a big hit, and if the type of special result is a probability variation hit, a high probability state is achieved when a game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h. However, if the type of special result is a normal hit, it may be set to a high-probability state and a time-saving state when a game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h. Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation special figure and a big hit occurs, and a gaming ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h, the probability state and the time saving state are set. That is, at least it may be related to the determination of the game value to be given whether or not it is a win in the main variation special map.

In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not the main variation special figure, it is a big hit and the probability variation operation area 38
When the game ball flows into h, the second specific game state ST3 is supposed to be transitioned to, but during the predetermined period after the first specific game state ST2 is completed and the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1, the main fluctuation special figure It is possible to shift to the first specific game state ST2 when the game ball is a big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game and the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h. This predetermined period may be from the start of the normal gaming state ST1 to the execution of the predetermined number of games, or may be the passage of a predetermined time. By doing this, the special figure fluctuation executed based on the game ball that has already been fired in the right direction even though the firing direction is returned to the left, is won based on winning in the second starting winning opening 37. It is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage when a special result is derived in the display game. In this case, the player has unintentionally launched the game, and the first specific game state ST1
By making it possible to shift to, it is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game from being dissatisfied.

On the contrary, when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variation display game which is not the main variation special figure in this predetermined period and the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h, the second specific game state ST3 is entered, When a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variation display game which is not the main variation special figure outside the predetermined period and the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h, the first specific game state ST2 may be entered. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player side from becoming too advantageous over what was supposed in the design of the gaming machine.

Further, although the main fluctuation special map is set in all the game states, the main fluctuation special map may be set only in some game states. When the special result is derived in the game state where the main fluctuation special map is not determined and the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h, one of the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 which is predetermined It is also possible to shift to, or to decide which to shift to depending on the type of special result or a separate lottery.

In addition, the hit value in the case of the main fluctuation special map is set to be higher than the hit value in the case of not being the main fluctuation special map, but on the contrary, the hit value in the case of the main fluctuation special map is The game value to be awarded may be lower than that in the case where is not the main variation special map. In other words, the frequency of hits in the case of non-main variation special maps is low and difficult to generate.
The game value given to such a rare hit may be increased. Similarly, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operating area 38h at normal hit, it is less frequent and difficult than when the game ball flows into the probability variation operating area 38h at probability variation, and thus the value of the game to be given is given. You may make it high.

In addition, as the third specific game state, there may be provided a state in which the winning probability is a low probability state and a time saving state (with time saving) for reducing the variation time of the special figure variation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode of the game state is a time saving mode and can be distinguished from other game states. Also,
The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed because the first starting winning opening 36 is aimed at. As a case of shifting to the third specific game state, for example, in the example of FIG. 8, a big hit in the first specific game state ST2, but V
It is assumed that there was no passage.

Further, a condition for shifting in more detail may be set, for example, in the first specific game state ST2, when the big hit is in the special figure 1 variable display game which is not the main variable special figure, but there is no V passage. You may make it shift to 3 specific game states. Alternatively, in the first specific game state ST2, the probability variation big hit (12R probability variation or 5R probability variation) in the special figure 1 variation display game which is not the main variation special figure
However, it may be possible to shift to the third specific game state when there is no V passage. In this case, if the special variation 2 variation display game which is the main variation special figure is a big hit, but there is no V passage, the state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 and the main variation special figure is hit. The game value to be given may be different depending on whether or not. In this case, the winning in the case of the main fluctuation special map is lower than the winning in the case of not being the main fluctuation special map.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the normal game state ST1 and the special result is obtained, the player intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game, and the first specific game state. S
When the game ball that has been shot to the right game area in the period until returning to the left hit when the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1 due to the end of T2 enters the second starting winning opening 37, the special figure 2 fluctuation display There may be executions that the player does not intend such that the game is executed. In the above-described embodiment, these cases are not distinguished, but the game value to be provided may be differently distinguished.

For example, when the special result is derived and V passes in the special figure 2 variable display game executed based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 that occurs in a predetermined period from the end of the first specific game state ST2, The second specific game state ST3 may be shifted to the first specific game state ST2. In addition to the predetermined period from the end of the first specific game state ST2, the special figure 2 variable display game from the end of the first specific game state ST2 to a predetermined number of times may be set.

From the above, when the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32 and the result of the variable display game is a special result, the player is given a game value. In a gaming machine that generates a special game state that can be provided, a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 are provided as starting winning openings, and a gaming ball is won in the first starting winning opening 36. The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37. A second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the variable display game, and one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game depending on the game state. Is defined as the main variable display game, and if one or both of the first variable display game and the second variable display game has a special result as the variable display game, It is possible to change the game value given to the player depending on whether or not the variable display game is the main variable display game. Therefore, the game can be played according to the design of the gaming machine.

The production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production of the game is provided, and the production control means is
Is configured to select one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes with different game effects, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, is the variable display game the main variable display game? When the game value given to the player is different depending on whether or not it is possible to set a different effect mode according to the game value given. Also, different effect modes can be set for the first specific game state and the second specific game state. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the game value given.

Further, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are arranged at different positions, and the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are adjusted by adjusting the firing force of the game ball. It is arranged in the game area 32 so that it can be selected between a state aiming to win a prize and a state aiming to win a second start winning port. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the main variable display game depending on the intention of the player.

In addition, the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time. That is, one of the variable display games has been ended with the result of failure.

When one or both of the first variable display game and the second variable display game have a special result as the variable display game, the variable display game is the main variable display game. In, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state after the end of the special game state,
When the variable display game is not the main variable display game, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state in which the game value given to the player is lower than the first specific game state after the special game state ends. Becomes Therefore, the game can be played according to the design of the gaming machine.

Further, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game balls to the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, it is possible to give the player a game value. In a gaming machine that generates a special game state, in the special game state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win and an open state in which the game ball can win, and the game ball can flow inside Special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 3) including a region (probability variation operation region 38h)
8), and a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 as starting winning openings, and a first variation display as a variable display game based on winning of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 36. A first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game, and a second variable display game capable of executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on winning of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 37. The variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) is provided, and based on the fact that the game balls that have won the special variation winning device flow into the specific region, the game balls are played more than when the game ball did not flow into the specific region. A player-friendly game state can be generated after the end of the special game state, and a variable display game in which one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is the variable display game is the main, depending on the game state. When one or both of the first variable display game and the second variable display game have a special result as the variable display game, the variable display game becomes the main one. It is possible to change the game value given to the player depending on whether or not the game is a variable display game. Therefore, the game can be played according to the design of the gaming machine.

Further, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the player can be provided with a game value. In a gaming machine that generates a special game state, a starting winning opening is provided with a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37, and a variable display based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 36. A first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as a game, and a second variable display as the variable display game based on winning of a game ball into the second start winning hole 37. And a second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the game, and one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is mainly used according to the game state. When the main variable display game shifts to a predetermined game state, the special result is derived in the main variable display game in the game state. In this case, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state after the special game state ends, and if the special result is derived in the variable display game that is not the main in the game state, the first after the special game state ends. It is possible to shift to the second specific game state in which the game value given to the player is lower than that in the specific game state. Therefore,
A game can be played according to the design of the gaming machine.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 104 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 104, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3),
Interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the effect contents are changed.

Then, the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal is set, and the LED by the player is set.
Hall/player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal and the volume is performed (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that performs settings for controlling the progress of the effect and edits of drawing commands. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds) is created, a V blank interrupt (1/6)
If 0 seconds is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate, and for example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching at a timing later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18). C18), the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing WDT (step C8).

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 105 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202).
). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (
In step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis operation is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

When it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Then, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
It returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is ended. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed together. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 106 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y
), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C2).
34).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C232; C2
34; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235)
;; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable system command (
In Step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (Step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit mid-stage effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small win mid-range effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (
Step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
In step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot system command such as a hold number command or an error command (step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, and a model designation command. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot type command (step C24
1; Y), the single-shot system command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command ((
In step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C2)
44) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable type command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis processing.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variability display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) in which the special figure variability display game is not executed becomes a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from the normal mode, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. Then, the pre-reading system commands (pre-reading variable system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is a command that gives advance notice of the variation pattern and the stop pattern corresponding to the starting memory that is the target of pre-reading effect, and from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-type commands and symbol-type commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 107 shows the variable command processing (step C in the received command analysis processing described above).
236). In this variable system command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the symbol system command processing described above.

When this special map type is not determined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (
(Step C362), it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (Step C
363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are not compatible (step C363; Y), the variable command processing is ended. If the variable command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3
63; N) determines the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, an outlier symbol, a 12R probability variation big hit symbol, a 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol, a 12R regular jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. When the variation command and the symbol type do not match, the variation command (
Although the variation pattern command) is received, it is a combination (combination of the variation command and the symbol type) that is inconsistent in performing the production, such as when the symbol command of the 12R probability variation big hit symbol is received. means.

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C366).
). Here, the state of changing the special map indicates that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable system command process ends.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 108 shows the variation effect setting process (step C36) in the above-described variation system command process.
5) is shown. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is variation without reach (step C381). When the variation pattern type is the reachless variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code and the special figure type and the presentation mode at that time is set (step C382). Since there is no reach variation, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and it is not necessary to specifically refer to the symbol type here. The effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300,
There are normal mode, probability variation mode, time saving mode, latent mode, etc., though they naturally vary depending on the model. Further, within each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 are different.

Next, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types to be reserved is acquired (step C383).
.. With this, in the case of a change without reach, it is possible to change the lottery content of the notice effect that appears during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of holdings. After that, the first-half notice distribution group table is used to perform a lottery for the notice that appears during the first-half change (step C386).

On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice. The preliminary announcement lottery that appears in (Step C386) is performed.

Next, the notice production of the second half change is drawn. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (a combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding the specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure becomes a big hit. Is stopped and is variably displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode and symbol type is set (step C387). The latter half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the latter half notice distribution group table.
Then, the address of the latter-half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the latter-half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second-half notice distribution group table is used to change the latter half (during reach). A lottery for advance notice will be made (step C389).
).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390),
The content of the effect corresponding to the preliminary announcement lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, effects such as the variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game and the main contents of the reach and the announcement are decided. In addition, the contents of a basic effect, a specific effect, and a common effect, which will be described later, are also determined. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol is performed by also referring to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special figure variation display game and the notice content (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the variation effect is set (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (
Step C394). By these processes, the effect and advance notice in the decorative special figure variable display game set as described above can be executed. Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special map type is performed (step C395). In this process, the decoration start memory display is set to be decreased corresponding to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C396), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C397). Further, in addition to the variable display of the identification information, in order to set the variable display of the fourth symbol displaying the decorative special figure variable display game, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , The variation effect setting process ends.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 109 shows single-shot system command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether or not MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261).
). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing for rewriting internal information to model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and single-shot system command processing is performed. To finish.

When it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), RA indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized is indicated.
It is determined whether the command corresponds to the M initialization command (step C263). And M
When it is determined that the ODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263)
; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the one-shot system command process ends. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area required for initialization is initialized and R
Set AM initialization screen information. Further, the scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to perform the effect when the RAM initialization is performed.

Further, when it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE outputs a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C is recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether they correspond (step C265). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot system command processing ends. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to perform an effect when power failure is recovered.

If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y),
A customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command process ends. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and the customer waiting scenario data is set to perform the customer waiting demonstration.

If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is the special figure 1 hold ((
Step C269). Then, when the MODE is the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y)
), a special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying a decoration start memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed (step C270), and the single-shot system command process ends. When it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the suspension of special figure 1 (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is suspension of special figure 2 (step C271). If the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing the process corresponding to the generated hold is performed (step C2).
72) and terminates the single command processing. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a start memory display means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information on the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

In addition, in step C271, if MODE is not the special figure 2 hold (step C271; N
), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). And MOD
If E is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

If MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N).
For MODE, it is determined whether MODE is error/invalid (step C275). And MO
If the DE is error/illegal (step C275; Y), error/illegal setting processing is performed to perform corresponding processing such as error notification (step C276), and the single-shot system command processing is ended. In the error/illegal setting process (step C276), a process of notifying when a command related to an error or a fraud is received, a process of displaying a warning when a right-handing instruction notification command or a left-handing instruction notification command is received, and the like are performed. ..

Also, in step C275, if MODE is not error/invalid (step C275;
In N), it is determined whether MODE is the effect mode switching (step C277). When MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing effect mode switching processing is performed (step C278), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE is not the effect mode switching in step C277 (step C277).
;N), MODE determines whether or not the symbol is stopped (step C279). And M
If the ODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot system command processing ends. When MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In determining whether the command is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is the special figure that is currently changing.

Then, if the command is not a normal command (step C280; N), the single-shot system command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special symbol is made (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Single-shot command processing ends. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The gaming state flag is a flag indicating the current gaming state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

Next, a display mode on the display device 41 will be described. FIG. 110(a) shows the display in the first specific game state ST2. In the upper left part of the display area of the display device 41, a game state display 81 for displaying the current game state is displayed. Here, the small hit RUSH mode which is the name of the first specific game state ST2 is displayed. Further, a firing direction instruction display 82 for instructing the firing direction is displayed in the upper right portion of the display area. In this firing direction instruction display 82, the firing direction is displayed by the direction of the arrow and characters. In addition, the game state display 81 in the upper left part of the display area
Below, is displayed a remaining number display 83 that displays the remaining number of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the current gaming state.

Further, in the center of the display area, a suggestion effect display 84 that is an effect that suggests the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed. The suggestion effect display 84 indicates the result of the special figure variation display game by the action of the character 84a and the dialogue 84b. Further, the direction in which the character 84a of the suggestion effect display 84 runs is the same as the firing direction (here, the right direction). Further, on the right side of the center of the display area, an expectation degree display 86 showing the degree of expectation that the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit is displayed. In this expected degree display 86, a plurality of areas are arranged vertically, and the expected degree is indicated by the number of areas in which the display color changes sequentially from the lower area. The suggestion effect display 84 and the expectation degree display 86 may be always displayed, or may be displayed only when necessary such as when performing an effect.

Further, on the right side of the center of the display area and below the expectation display 86, an operation promotion display 87 that prompts the user to operate the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is displayed. The operation promotion display 87 is displayed during an operable period in the operation reflection effect in which the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is reflected in the effect, and prompts the player to perform the operation. Further, in the lower center of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is provided. In this case, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display.

FIG. 110(b) shows the display in the second specific game state ST3. FIG. 110(a)
Compared to the case of the first specific game state ST2 shown in, the display position of the firing direction instruction display 82 is different and is displayed in the upper part of the display area. The firing direction is the same as the direction of the arrow and is displayed by characters, but the display width and other display modes are different. Further, the effect in the suggestion effect display 84 is performed by the character 84a and the dialogue 84b as in the case of the first specific game state ST2, but the running direction of the character 84a is the left direction which is the firing direction. Also,
The decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 for displaying the decorative special figure variation display game is provided in the center of the display area so as to overlap the suggestion effect display 84. In addition, the display state (display method, display background, frame surrounding display, etc.) and display position of the game state display 81, the remaining number display 83, the expectation degree display 86, and the operation promotion display 87 are the first specific game state ST2. Is the same as in.

At the lower center of the display area, there is provided a storage display section 88 for displaying information on the starting memory. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first starting memory for suspending execution of the special figure variation display game is the first.
Since only the starting memory is stored, the memory display portion 88 is not displayed in the first specific game state ST2 in which the main variation special map is the special figure 2 variation display game. In this memory display unit 88, the upper limit number (
Here, the number of display areas 88b corresponding to 4) is provided, and in this display area 88b, the decorative special figure start-up memory display 88a corresponding to the start-up memory one-on-one is displayed in the order of storage. Here it is shown that there is one starting memory. The decoration special figure starting memory display 88a displayed in the display area 88b at the left end is the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the earliest stored starting memory,
It moves to the left every time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to each starting memory and the pre-read result such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

On the left side of the storage display unit 88, a running storage display unit 89 that displays information regarding the starting storage corresponding to the currently-running special figure variation display game is provided. On the running memory display section 89, the decorative special figure start memory display 88 at the left end of the memory display section 88 at the start of the special figure variation display game is displayed.
The display mode indicates the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed and the variation pattern of the character a.

In both the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, since the jackpot probability is a high probability state, the display on the display device 41 is partly common as described above, so that the high probability is achieved in both cases. A special effect can be executed in the state, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In addition, by making the display common, the data and processing of the images and effects stored in the effect control device 300 can be made common, and the burden of game control can be reduced.

FIGS. 110(c) and 110(d) show an example of the warning display 90 displayed when the launch of the game ball in the launch direction different from the designated launch direction is detected. Note that the warning display 90 is performed when the effect control device 300 receives a right-handing instruction notification command or a left-handing instruction notification command from the game control device 100, but is set in the starting mouth switch monitoring process (see FIG. 36). When a right-handing instruction notification command or a left-handing instruction notification command is received, a warning display 90 is displayed,
When the right-handing instruction notification command or the left-handing instruction notification command set by other than this is received, the firing direction instruction display 82 is started. These commands are identified by the effect control device 300.
The command may be identified depending on the situation when the command is received, or the game control device 100 may add information for identifying these commands and transmit the information.

FIG. 110(c) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the first specific game state ST2,
FIG. 110(d) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the second specific game state ST3. In any case, the warning display 90 is displayed on the front side in priority to the other displays in the center of the display area. The warning display 90 in the case of the first specific game state ST2 shown in FIG. 110(c) is shown in FIG.
Similar to the shooting direction instruction display 82 in the second specific game state ST3 shown in 0(d), it is displayed by a horizontally long arrow extending over the left and right of the display area. Further, the warning display 90 in the case of the second specific game state ST3 shown in FIG. 110(d) is displayed by a thick arrow like the firing direction instruction display 82 in the first specific game state ST2 shown in FIG. 110(c). It

110E and 110F show another example of the warning display 90. 111(e) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the first specific game state ST2, and FIG. 111(f) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the second specific game state ST3. In this example, the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 111(e) and the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 111(f) have different display contents. It can be said that the examples of FIGS. 110(c) and 110(d) are warning displays 90 having different display modes and display contents, and the examples of FIGS. 110(e) and 110(f) have the same display mode. It can be said that it is the display 90.

Further, another example of the warning display 90 is shown in FIGS. 111(a) and 111(b). 111(a) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the first specific game state ST2, and FIG. 111(b) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the second specific game state ST3. In this example, FIG.
The warning display 90 shown in a) and the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 111(b) have the same display mode and display contents.

Further, another example of the warning display 90 is shown in FIGS. 111(c) to 111(f). FIG. 111(c)
Is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the first specific game state ST2, and FIG. 111(d) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the second specific game state ST3. In addition, FIG.
) Is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the normal game state ST1, and FIG. 111(f) is a state in which the winning probability is a low probability state and a time saving state in which the variation time of the special figure variation display game is shortened (there is a time saving). ) Warning display 90 when the third specific game state (time saving mode) is provided
Is an example of displaying. Since the third specific game state is short, the main variation special map is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the firing direction is right-handed. In this example, the display mode and display contents of the warning display 90 shown in FIGS. 111(c) to (f) are the same in all game states. It should be noted that the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 111(a) can also be commonly used in all game states.

In addition to this, as a display to be displayed on the display device 41, a standby display for notifying that the game is in the special game state and is waiting for the start of a new special figure variation display game may be performed. When a special game state occurs due to a small hit or a big hit in the special figure variation display game, a new special figure variation display game cannot be started until the special game state ends. In particular, if a special figure variation display game that is not the main variation special figure causes a special result and a special game state occurs, the player often does not intend, and the special variation variation display game that is the main variation special figure is temporary. There is a risk that the player may feel distrust of being unable to start.

Therefore, a standby display may be displayed to inform the player that the special figure variation display game cannot be started because the special game state has occurred, so that the player does not feel distrust. .. As such a standby display, for example, the display device 41 may be displayed such as “please wait for a while”, or a display that clearly informs that a small hit has occurred. You can It should be noted that when a big hit occurs, it can be clearly recognized, and thus the standby display may not be performed.

Further, it may be possible to select whether or not to perform the standby display according to the game state. For example,
The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3.
The standby display is performed, and the specific display is not performed in the first specific game state ST2. In the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, since the variation time is extremely long for the special figure 2 variable display game which is not the main variation special figure, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started. It is possible to forget that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. As the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is only a small hit and a big hit, the player forgets that it is running. When the special figure 2 variable display game ends, a special game state occurs unintentionally. As described above, the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the main variation special figure, is temporarily unexecutable. In particular, since a predetermined number of start-up memories can be stored for the special figure 1 variable display game, the player may feel distrust of the situation in which the special figure variable display game cannot be started despite the start memory. .. Therefore, the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state S
At T3, it is preferable to perform a standby display to notify that the special figure variation display game is on standby.

[Big hit type command processing]
Next, the notification of the opening time of the special variation winning device will be described. FIG. 112 shows the big hit system command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this big hit system command processing, it is first determined whether MODE is fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the design information (stop design number or stop design pattern). If MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y),
The fanfare display effect setting process for setting the fanfare display image according to the type of big hit and the small hit is performed (step C402), the P machine state is set to fanfare (step C403), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

If MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. If the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number-of-rounds display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set to "in-round" (step C406). The big hit system command processing ends.

If MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting effects during the interval is performed (step C408), and the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminates command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the final round.

If MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), the ending effect setting process is performed to set the screen information corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit (step C).
411), the P machine state is set to ending (step C412), and the big hit system command processing ends. If MODE is not the ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a special winning opening count command based on a winning of the special variation winning device 38.

When MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the big hit system command processing ends. When MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to the winning of the special variation winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit system command process is ended.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 113A shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this count effect setting process, first, the winning symbol information is acquired (step C501). The winning symbol information is the game control device 10 at the start of the special game state.
It is information based on a winning symbol command transmitted from 0, and is information on the type of winning symbol.
Based on the hit symbol information, it is determined whether the special game state being executed is based on the probability variation big hit (step C502).

When the special game state in execution is not based on the probability variation big hit (step C502; N)
Ends the count effect setting process. In this case, the effect based on the winning of the special variable winning device is not performed. If the special game state being executed is based on the probability variation big hit (step C502; Y), it is determined whether it is a specific round (step C503). The specific round is a round in which the game ball may flow into the probability variation operating region 38h forming the specific region, and is the first round in the present embodiment.

When it is not the specific round (step C503; N), the count effect setting process is ended. In the case of the specific round (step C503; Y), the prize counter for counting the number of prizes in the specific round is updated by +1 (step C504), and the notification time table corresponding to the winning symbol information is acquired ( Step C505). Then, the notification time corresponding to the winning counter value is acquired (step C506), the acquired notification time is displayed on the acquisition time display 92 (step C507), and the count effect setting process is ended.

FIG. 113(b) shows an example of the notification time table. When the winning symbol is 12R probability variation, when one game ball is won in the first special variation winning device 38 in the specific round, 1.80 seconds is selected as the notification time. After that, about 1.80 seconds is added to the notification time for each of the second to eighth winnings, and the notification time is set to 19.89 seconds by the ninth winning, which is the upper limit number of winnings in the specific round. In the case of 12R probability variable big hit, the opening mode in 2-12 rounds after the specific round is the openable time of 1808 ms because it is the lower short open, and the total value of the openable time in these 2-12 rounds is It is 19888 ms. A part of the total value is sequentially notified for each winning in the specific round, and all the total values are notified when the upper limit value in the specific round is won.

Also in the case of 5R probability big hit, part of 9040 ms, which is the total value of the openable time, is announced for each winning in the specific round, and all the total values are notified when winning the maximum value in the specific round. Becomes In the case of the 2R probability variable big hit, all the openable time is notified by the fifth prize. In this way, the openable time afterward is sequentially notified for each winning in the specific round, so that the interest in the specific round is improved.

Note that the notification time table shown in FIG. 113(b) is an example, and other notification modes may be selected. For example, in the case of 12R probability variation big hit, 5 to 1 to 8th
It may be the same as the R probability variation big hit, and may be displayed for 19.89 seconds by winning the ninth prize. Further, even in the case of the 12R probability variation big hit, the notification may be the same as that of the 5R probability variation big hit, and there may be a case where not all of the openable time is notified. In this case, an effect may be performed such that the time value is added at a specific timing after the second round.

In addition, when the number of game balls does not reach the upper limit number in the specific round, the acquisition time display may be ambiguously displayed as "?? seconds" with the end of the specific round, or the end of the specific round or the second round. It is possible to display the same value as when the game balls have won the upper limit number with the start of the eyes. Alternatively, the time value corresponding to the number of game balls won in the specific round may be kept displayed, and the time value may be added at a specific timing after the second round.

114 and 115 show an example of notification of the openable time. In this example, it is in the first specific game state ST2, and as shown in FIG. 114(a), the same display as that shown in FIG. 110(a) is made. Further, here, an acquired ball number display portion 91 is displayed which displays the number of game balls acquired from the end of the normal game state ST1 to the next normal game state ST1. Here, it is shown that 1250 balls have been acquired.

Then, as shown in FIG. 114(b), a special result is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, and the special game state is started. The first round of special game state is a specific round,
As shown in FIG. 114(c), the effect of the specific round is performed. In this effect, an effect that the opening time of the special variable prize device is increased by winning the first special variable prize device 38 is performed, and the game state display 81 for displaying the current game state indicates " In addition to being displayed as "time stock mode," there is an explanation display in the center of the display area that displays "Prize and save time!!" and an acquisition time display 92 (here 0 seconds) that displays the acquired time. Done.

Further, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 moves to the lower left part of the display area and displays the derived special result. Further, the display of the acquired ball number display portion 91 is continued, and the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is also added.

After that, when the first game ball wins, the acquisition time display 92 as shown in FIG. 114(d).
Is added with the time value according to the type of special result and the number of winnings. Here, since the special result is the 12R probability change, 1.80 seconds are added. Furthermore, if the second game ball wins,
As shown in FIG. 14(e), 1.80 seconds are added to the acquisition time display 92 to become 3.60 seconds.
Then, when the ninth game ball, which is the upper limit number in the specific round, wins, the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 19.89 seconds as shown in FIG. 114(f).

When the first round, which is a specific round, is finished and the interval time is reached, FIG.
As shown in (), the explanation display in the center of the display area becomes “stock releasing”, indicating that the acquired time is released. Next, when the second round is started and the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, the time of the acquisition time display 92 decreases over the opened period. Since the openable time in the second round is 1808 ms, at the end of the open in the second round, as shown in FIG.
As shown in 15(c), the value of the acquisition time display 92 is 18.08 seconds.

Further, with the start of the second round when the stock is released, the display of the special result displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 is erased. As a result, it is possible not to be aware of being in the special gaming state, and to give an impression as if a small hit has occurred in the first specific gaming state ST2. It should be noted that an effect display similar to the effect display in the first specific game state ST2 as shown in FIG. 114(a) from the second round may be used.

The openable time for the third round is 1808 ms. As shown in FIG. 115(c), the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 16.27 seconds at the end of the opening of the third round. Then, at the end of the opening of the 12th round which is the final round, the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 00.00 seconds as shown in FIG. 115(d), and the explanation display shows "stock released" and the special game is displayed. The state will end. Probability change operation area 38 in a specific round of special game state
When the game ball flows into h, the display in the first specific game state ST2 as shown in FIG. 115(e) is made with the end of the special game state. In addition, when the game ball does not flow into the probability variation operating region 38h in the particular round of the special game state, the display in the normal game state ST1 is displayed as the special game state ends.

As described above, the effect in the special game state is not clearly shown in the special game state, and the first
By making the effect that the specific game state ST2 continues, it is possible to make a novel effect that has never been seen before. That is, in this embodiment, the small hit frequently occurs in the first specific game state ST2, and the special game state based on the small hit frequently occurs. When a special result is obtained in such a game state, each round is a special game state based on a small hit by making a plurality of rounds the same operation mode and effect as the special game state based on a small hit. It is possible to perform such a production. Thereby, the first specific game state S advantageous for the player
It is possible to make T2 appear to be continuing for a long period of time, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

If the interval time between rounds is set to be equal to the execution time of the special figure variation display game when the small hit result is obtained in the first specific game state ST2, the game in the special game state is the first specific game. The game becomes like the game in the state ST2, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, in the interval time, as in the case of FIG. 114(a), if the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 is pseudo-variably displayed and stopped in a specific result mode, the next round is started. The game in the special game state becomes like the game in the first specific game state ST2, and the interest of the game can be improved. Specific result modes include, for example, a small hit result mode or a result mode that can be derived only during a special game state. Also, if the fanfare time and ending time in the special game state are set to short times (for example, 100 ms), the start and end of the special game state become difficult to understand, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in the pseudo variable display performed on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 at the interval time, in order to make it more clear that the pseudo variable display is a decorative special figure variable display game, Identification information that is not used in the variable display game may be used. Further, the background and the edge of the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 may be made different to clearly notify the pseudo variable display. Examples of the method of making different modes include different transparency, different shades, different colors, and different sizes. Further, as a result mode, a result mode indicating a round to be started may be displayed. For example, when performing in the interval time between the second round and the third round, the result mode such as “3”, “R”, and “eye” may be displayed as the result mode and the third round may be started.

Also, in the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of second starting memories may be stored as starting memories, and a decorative starting memory display for displaying information of the second starting memories may be displayed on the display device 41. In this case, the decoration starting memory display may be displayed even during the special game state, and the pseudo starting display may not be reduced so that the pseudo starting display can be understood. Further, when a running memory display section 89 for displaying information on a starting memory corresponding to a currently running special figure variation display game as shown in FIG. 117 described later is provided, the running memory display section 89 is specially provided. It may be displayed even during the game state, and a specific image such as "win" may be displayed here. By doing so, it is possible to show that the fluctuation is pseudo.

Further, although the special result mode is displayed as it is as the display of the decoration special view variation display game display section 85 during the special game state generated in the first specific game state ST2, the display mode other than this is also possible. Good or not to display. As another display mode, only one piece of identification information may be displayed, or information different from the identification information may be displayed as the information indicating the hit. By doing so, it is possible not to be aware of being in the special game state, and the game in the special game state is the first specific game state S.
It becomes like a game at T2, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the special result mode in the decorative special figure variation display game in the first specific game state ST2 is the same as the special result mode (same number grid) in the decorative special figure variation display game in the normal game state ST1. The special result mode different from the special result mode in the normal gaming state ST1 may be used. By doing so, it is possible not to be aware of the derivation of the special result and not to be aware of the subsequent special game state, and the game during the special game state is the first specific game state ST2. It becomes like the game of, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As such a special result mode, for example, not the same number grid, but the identification information is incremented by 1 as it goes to the right like "123" or the identification information goes to the right as "321". The information may not be decremented by 1 and may be reversed. In addition, "121", "112", "211"
Part of the variable display areas may be added to the identification information of the other variable display areas by one, or conversely, some of the variable display areas such as “212”, “221”, and “122”. May be -1 to the identification information of another variable display area. Further, for example, like "492", in the normal game state ST1, it may be a specific result mode out of the result modes of the deviation result. Further, some or all of the variable display areas such as "1A1" and "AAA" may be stopped at the identification information ("A" here) that is not used in the normal gaming state ST1.

Although the specific round is the first round, it may be a round other than this. Further, the conversion to the open state may be performed plural times in one round. For example, the conversion to the open state may be performed twice by providing a period of once in the closed state in each round.
Of course, the conversion to the open state may be performed three times or more. Even in this case, it is preferable that the period of the open state is substantially the same as the open time in the special game state based on the small hit. In addition, it is preferable that the period of the closed state is equal to the execution time of the special figure variation display game when the small hit result is obtained in the first specific game state ST2. Thereby, it is possible to give an impression as if the first specific game state ST2 continues for a long time. Even when the conversion to the open state is performed a plurality of times in one round, it is possible to notify the time value obtained by summing the openable times of each time.

Further, instead of notifying the openable time in the special game state, the number of times of opening may be notified. For example, in the case of the 12R probability variation big hit, it is notified that the remaining 11 times are open in the specific round, and the remaining number is subtracted each time the round is executed. When the conversion to the open state is performed multiple times in one round, the number of conversions to the open state is indicated. For example, in the case where each round is provided with a period of once being in the closed state so that the conversion to the open state is performed twice, it is possible to notify that there are the remaining 22 times of opening. If there is a possibility that the round will end when the maximum number of game balls is won in the special variation winning device for a long openable time, even if the openable time is notified, it does not reach the notified time. Although there is a possibility that the round will end and there is a risk of inconsistency in notification, if the number of times of opening is notified, such a problem can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, the game ball is the first special variation winning device 38 for the condition of notification of the openable time in a specific round.
However, it is not limited to this. For example, the condition of notification may be the occurrence of a special gaming state, the start of a specific round, the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the specific round, or the like.

Further, when notifying the total value of the openable time, the value less than the second may not be notified. Alternatively, a value less than seconds may be displayed so as to approximately match the actual openable time. Since the value less than second is a moment for the player, there is no problem even if it is not displayed accurately. Also, it is easier to visualize the remaining time by displaying the values with good separation. For example, FIG.
When the notification time table shown in (b) specifies 14.40 seconds, values less than seconds may be rounded or truncated and displayed as 14 seconds. In addition, 0.5 seconds may be displayed as a unit, and when 14.40 seconds is specified in the notification time table, 0.1 seconds may be added to display 14.5 seconds. Thus, FIG.
In the notification time table shown in (b), the openable time including the value less than second may be defined, and the value less than second may be corrected at the time of display. In this case, the value to be corrected may be defined in the notification time table or may be calculated each time. Further, the value itself of the notification time table may be data in which a value less than a second is corrected.

In addition to the openable time in which the special variable winning device is opened, the time displayed in the acquisition time display 92 is an interval time, a time required for opening or closing the special variable winning device, or the display device 41. The time required for updating the image, the ending time, and the like may be included. For example, the time including all of the period from the timing when the special variation winning device, which is the timing when the first round ends, to the time when the ending ends and the special figure variation display game starts, is displayed. Is also good.

Further, a part of the openable time may be notified on the acquisition time display 92, and an effect may be given to indicate or notify that the time value may be added to the acquisition time display 92. FIG. 116 shows an example of such an effect. Here, an example of the special game state based on the 12R probability variation big hit is shown.

As shown in FIG. 116(a), when the specific round is started, the acquisition time display 92 is displayed. After that, when the first game ball wins the special variation winning device, 1.80 seconds are added to the acquisition time display as shown in FIG. 116(b). Also, at the bottom right of the display area, the stock display 97
Is displayed. The stock display 97 indicates or informs that the time value is added to the acquisition time display 92. That is, there is a possibility that the open time is stocked in the acquisition time display 92 and the further open time is stocked in the stock display 97. This stock display 97 is such that the value is incremented by 1 each time a prize is won in the special variable winning device.

In this example, the special game state is based on the 12R certainty variation jackpot, but the change of the acquisition time display 92 is the same as the 5R certainty variation jackpot. When the ninth game ball, which is the upper limit number in the specific round, wins, the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 9.04 seconds and the value of the stock display becomes 9 as shown in FIG. 116(c). Becomes Here, since it is the special game state based on the 12R probability variation big hit, the total of the openable time of 2R to 12R is 19.89 seconds, and the acquisition time display 92 shows a state in which only a part of the openable time is informed. There is.

When the first round, which is a specific round, ends and the interval time is reached, FIG.
As shown in (), the explanation display in the center of the display area becomes “stock releasing”, indicating that the acquired time is released. After that, the value of the acquisition time display 92 decreases with the opening of the special variation winning device, and the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 0 seconds as shown in FIG. 116(e) with the end of the fifth round.

Then, as shown in FIG. 116(e), the stock display 97 is released toward the acquisition time display 92, and an effect is exerted on the acquisition time display 92. At this time, the effect is repeatedly performed by the value of the stock display 97, and the value of the stock display 97 can be decreased and the value of the acquisition time display 92 can be increased for each effect. As a result of this production,
As shown in 16(f), the value of the acquisition time display 92 increases and the sixth round is started. Even in the case of the 5R probability variable big hit, the same effect as in FIGS. 116(a) to (e) is performed, and FIG.
At the stage of (f), the time value is not added to the acquisition time display 92 and the special game state can be ended by remaining 0 seconds.

In the effect shown in FIG. 116(e), a plurality of stock displays 97 may be simultaneously displayed on the acquisition time display 92. Further, the increase amount of the value of the acquisition time display 92 by the one stock display 97 may be 1.8 seconds for one round as an upper limit, or may be increased without an upper limit. Further, in the specific round, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased every time the prize is won, or the value may not be increased even if the prize is won. Further, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased one by one, or may be increased by two or more. Further, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased regardless of winning. Furthermore, it may be suggested that the larger the value of the stock display 97 is, the higher the increase amount of the value of the acquisition time display 92 is in the effect of FIG. 116(e).

Further, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased even in a period other than the specific round. For example,
The value of the stock display 97 may be increased during the period from FIG. 116(d) to (e).
Further, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased again in the rounds after FIG. 116(f). In this case, a part of the openable time scheduled at the stage of FIG. 116(f) may be notified. In addition, the increase of the acquisition time display 92 as shown in FIG.
It does not have to be based on the stock display 97, and any time value may be added with or without any effect.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game is the special result, the control means for controlling the game in the game machine that generates the special game state advantageous to the player. The (game control device 100), and a special variation winning device 38, 39 capable of converting from a closed state in which the game ball cannot win to an open state in which the game ball can win, the control means includes a plurality of game devices in the special game state. It is possible to convert the special variation winning device to the open state according to the predetermined opening time for each round of, and the special variation winning scheduled after the notification condition is satisfied in response to the predetermined notification condition being satisfied. The opening time can be notified according to the open state of the device.
Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the notification of the opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device is not necessarily limited to the notification of an accurate value, but the notification of the approximate time or the length of the opening time in plural steps instead of the time. For example, the notification may be made in three steps.

Further, the notification condition is to be a specific round in the special gaming state, the control means, in response to the establishment of the notification condition, the special variation winning device in the open state in each round after the specific round. The total time value of the corresponding opening times will be notified. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in response to the game ball winning the special variation winning device in a particular round in the special gaming state, it is possible to notify the opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in the rounds after the particular round. There will be. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when a predetermined number of game balls have won the special variable winning device in the round, the control means ends the round even before the opening time corresponding to the open state of the special variable winning device has elapsed. The special variation winning device is controlled to be closed, and in a particular round in the special gaming state, every time a game ball is won in the special variation winning device, the total opening time in each round after the particular round is totaled. When a part of the time value is notified and a predetermined number of game balls are won in the special variation winning device, all of the total time value of the opening time in each round after the particular round is notified. It has been done. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the special result includes a first special result accompanied by the operation of the condition device and a second special result not accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the control means is advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result. It is possible to convert the special variation winning device into an open state in accordance with a predetermined opening time for each of a plurality of rounds in the gaming state, and in a particular round in the gaming state that is advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result, the identification. Special fluctuations in rounds subsequent to this round can be notified of the opening time according to the open status of the winning device, and special fluctuations in rounds after a specific round in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result The opening time according to the open state of the winning device,
The opening time is the same as the opening time corresponding to the open state of the special variation winning device in the game state advantageous to the player corresponding to the second special result. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the openable time (opening time) in the first special result (big hit) and the openable time (opening time) in the second special result (small hit) are the same, but they are completely the same. There may be a difference that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the two. In the above embodiment,
The openable time based on the small hit is 1792 ms, and the openable time in the lower short open of the big hit is 1808 ms, which are different openable times, but the difference between them is 16 m.
It is s, and it is difficult for the player to determine the difference in the openable time. Therefore, it can be said that the openable time is substantially the same. Although the difference in the openable time may be more than this, it is preferable that the difference is such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two.

Further, when a predetermined number of game balls have won the special variable winning device in the round, the control means ends the round even before the opening time corresponding to the open state of the special variable winning device has elapsed. The special variable winning device is controlled so as to be in a closed state, and in a specific round in a game state that is advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result, the specific variable winning device is awarded each time a game ball wins. Part of the total time value of the open time according to the open state of the special variable winning device in each round after the round is announced, and if a predetermined number of game balls have won the special variable winning device, This means that all of the total time values of the open time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in each round after the round are notified. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the suggestion of the degree of expectation in reach production will be described. First, the normal gaming state ST1
The display on the display device 41 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 117(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 for displaying the first decorative game of the decorative special figure variation display games is provided. In this case, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display. In the upper left part of the display area, a second decoration game display section 95 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display section 95 is the same as the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85, and is the left area, the middle area, and the right area. After the identification information is variably displayed, the display is stopped and the result is displayed.

Further, a memory display portion 88 for displaying a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory is provided in the lower center of the display area. The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the memory display unit 88 is the first
It corresponds to the starting memory one-to-one, and is displayed side by side in the memory order.
It shows that there is a starting memory. The first memory on the left is the special decoration starting memory display
It is a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to starting memory, and is adapted to shift to the left each time it is consumed.

Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to each starting memory and the pre-read result such as the variation pattern by the display mode. Note that in FIG. 117(a), pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is performed for the first starting memory having the first digestion order.

On the left side of the storage display unit 88, a running storage display unit 89 that displays information regarding the starting storage corresponding to the currently-running special figure variation display game is provided. The decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the storage display section 88 is transferred to the running memory display section 89 at the start of the special figure variable display game, and the result and variation pattern of the special figure variable display game to be executed are displayed. Is indicated by its display mode. Further, in the upper right part of the display area, a start memory number display section 96 for displaying the start memory number is provided. The number of first starting memories is displayed on the starting memory number display portion 96.

When the first starting memory is exhausted and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 117(a), FIG. 117(b)
As shown in FIG. 5, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the memory display unit 88 is being executed.
The display that flows into is displayed. Here, the result and variation pattern of the special figure variation display game are also suggested in the running memory display unit 89 in the same manner as the prefetch effect. In addition, the number stored in the starting memory display portion 96 is decreased by one.

Then, the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 starts the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory, and is identified in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas. The variable display of information is started. Also in the second decoration game display unit 95, the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory is started, and the identification information is displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area. The variable display is started.

Thereafter, when the reach state is reached, the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left variation display area and the right variation display area of the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 as shown in FIG. 117(c). In the temporarily stopped state, the identification information is displayed as if it shakes, indicating that it is not completely stopped. Further, also in the second decoration game display portion 95, the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area.

When the SP reach is developed, a character or the like is produced as shown in FIG. 117(d). In this case, the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85, the storage display section 88 and the in-execution storage display section 89 are erased and the reach effect is displayed in the center of the display area. It should be noted that the display of the second decoration game display unit 95 and the starting memory number display unit 96 is continued, and the state of the special figure variation display game and the starting memory number can be confirmed.

In the state shown in FIG. 117(c), the reach state in which the identification information of the medium variation display area is stopped and the special figure variation display game ends is N reach, and as shown in FIG. The reach state performed is SP reach. In addition to the effects shown here, there are multiple types of effects for SP reach. For each reach effect, a selection probability when a special result is obtained is set. That is, the degree of expectation that is a special result is set for each reach effect.

Further, the reach effect performed in N reach or SP reach is used as a basic effect, and a common effect that can be commonly executed can be added to the basic effect and executed. FIG. 118 shows an example of the common effect.

FIG. 118(a) is a reach effect (basic effect) that is a big hit if the teammate character escapes from the enemy character, and FIGS. 118(b) to (e) show a common effect 94 added to the reach effect forming this basic effect. It is an example. Further, FIG. 118(f) is a reach effect (basic effect) in which a teammate character and an enemy character fight, and a teammate character wins a big hit.
(G) to (j) are examples in which the common effect 94 is added to the reach effect forming the basic effect.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 118(a) and 118(f), in the basic effect, it is possible to execute the specific effect 93 in which the effect content is represented by character information.

The common effect 94 is an effect that is common to each of the basic effects and is accompanied by character information of "expectation level UP". The common effect 94 also has a plurality of kinds of effects, as shown in FIG.
The common effect 94 of (g) is an effect of displaying only character information, and the common effect 94 of FIGS. 118(c) and 118(h) is an effect of displaying character information surrounded by a solid line, and FIG. 118(d). , (I) the common effect 94 is an effect for displaying character information in a shaded manner.

In addition, FIGS. 118(e) and 118(j) are effects in which the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 that show effect contents by character information are simultaneously executed. The common effect 94 in this case is shown in FIG. 118(b).
The effect of displaying only the character information as shown in Fig. 118, the effect of displaying the character information as shown in Fig. 118(c) surrounded by a solid line, and the character information as shown in Fig. 118(d) by shading. There is an effect to display. In addition, in (b) to (e) and (g) to (j) of FIG. 118, the common effect 94 accompanied by the character information of “expectation level UP” is shown, but there are a plurality of types other than this. .. In addition, the specific effect 93 is not limited to one that indicates the effect contents by character information.

An expectation level is also set for each common effect, and the expectation level as a special result is more clearly suggested by the expectation level of the basic effect and the expectation level of the common effect 94. This common production 9
The degree of expectation 4 is different depending on the type of basic effect combined even with the same type of common effect 94.

In the example of FIG. 118, the degree of expectation of the basic effect shown in FIG. 118(a) is 50%.
The expectation of the basic effect shown in (f) is 60%. Then, the degree of expectation of the common effect 94 displaying only the character information is 10% in the case of FIG. 118(b) and 20% in the case of FIG. 118(g). Further, the degree of expectation of the common effect 94 in which the character information is displayed surrounded by a solid line is 40% in the case of FIG. 118(c) and 10% in the case of FIG. 118(h).
In addition, the degree of expectation of the common effect 94 in which the character information is displayed in a shaded manner is 3 in the case of FIG. 118(d).
It is 0% and is 30% in the case of FIG. 118(i).

Further, a common presentation 94 that displays character information that is performed together with the specific presentation 93 by enclosing it with solid lines.
The expected degree of is 50% in the case of FIG. 118(c) and is 20% in the case of FIG. 118(h). The degree of expectation of the common effect 94 when the specific effect 93 is simultaneously executed is a value obtained by adding 10% to the degree of expectation when the same type of common effect 94 is not executed simultaneously with the specific effect 93.

That is, the common effect 94 is composed of a plurality of elements (character information, a surrounding frame, etc.), and there are a plurality of types of common effects 94 in which at least one element is common and the other elements are different. It is possible to have different expectations. Furthermore, it is possible to make the expectations of the plurality of types of common effects 94 different depending on the types of the combined basic effects and the specific effects 93. Moreover, even if each element is the same common presentation 94,
It is possible to change the degree of expectation according to the combined basic effects.

In this way, the degree of expectation of the common effect 94 varies depending on the type of basic effect combined even if the common effect 94 of the same type is used. The order of the degree of expectation of the plurality of types of common effects 94 when combined with a certain basic effect does not necessarily match the order of the degree of expectation of the plurality of types of common effect 94 when combined with another basic effect. It is supposed to happen. This does not show that the degree of expectation is high simply by adding the common effect, but the expectation of the common effect 94 is determined by the combination of the basic effect and the common effect 94. On the other hand, a plurality of expectations are associated with each other, which makes it possible to enhance the interest of the entire production and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the degree of expectation indicated by the basic effect and the degree of expectation indicated by the common effect 94 are independent of each other, and the degree of expectation is indicated by a plurality of indexes, which makes it easy to grasp the correct degree of expectation. For example, it is estimated that the high degree of expectation is high if the high degree of expectation is performed in both the basic effect and the common effect 94. Further, one of the basic effect and the common effect 94 is an effect with high expectation,
On the other hand, in the case of a production with low expectations, it is estimated that the expectations may be low.

With the above-mentioned degree of expectation, when the same common effect 94 is performed for each basic effect, the difference in the degree of expectation of the common effect 94 is a different value (10% in FIGS. 118(b) and (g)).
Difference of 30% between FIGS. 118(c) and (h), 0% difference between FIGS. 118(d) and (i))
However, this difference may be set to the same value as the difference in the degree of expectation in the basic effect. For example, since there is a difference of 10% between the expected 50% of the basic effects shown in FIG. 118(a) and the expected 60% of the basic effects shown in FIG. 118(f), there is a difference of 10%. On the other hand, when the same common effect 94 is performed, the difference in the degree of expectation of the common effect 94 may be 10%.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 118(b) to (d) and (g) to (i), it is possible to prevent the common effect 94 from being performed while the specific effect 93 is being executed. The area in which the common effect 94 is displayed can be partially or entirely overlapped with the area in which the specific effect 93 is displayed.

In this way, by preventing the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 from being performed at the same time, it is possible to prevent a large number of effects from being performed at the same time and the effect contents to be complicated, and in particular, an effect involving character information is not performed at the same time. By doing so, it is easy for the player to understand. Furthermore, the area in which the common effect 94 is displayed is made to partially or entirely overlap with the area in which the specific effect 93 is displayed, so that the position at which the player confirms the information is prevented from changing significantly, To make it easier to get.

In addition, as a general rule, the special effect 93 and the common effect 94 are not performed at the same time, if the special effect 93 and the common effect 94 can be simultaneously executed as an exception as shown in FIGS. 118(e) and 118(j).
It becomes clear that the common effect 94 in this case indicates that the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit. On the contrary, as a general rule, the specific effect 9 and the common effect 94 are simultaneously executed.
With the exception that 3 and the common effect 94 are not performed at the same time, the degree of expectation may be higher when the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are not performed at the same time.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the common effect 94 is assigned to a layer different from the basic effect and the specific effect 93, and the layer of the common effect 94 is arranged in the foreground. By doing so, the common effect 94 can be surely made visible. Also, the common presentation 94
The layer of may be semi-transparent so that the image of the layer behind can be seen through. By doing so, even if the common effect 94 is displayed for a plurality of different basic effects, the basic effect is always visible because the image of the rear basic effect is transparent, and is common when creating the basic effect. It is not necessary to consider the display position of the effect 94, and the degree of freedom in creating the basic effect is not impaired.

Such basic effects and common effects are selected based on the result of the special figure variation display game or the variation pattern selected by the game control device 100 in the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. When the execution mode is shown in FIGS. 118(b) to (d) and (g) to (i), the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are not executed at the same time, and the execution mode is shown in FIG.
In the case of 18 (e) and (j), the execution timings of both are set so that the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are executed at the same time.

The specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are not limited to those accompanied by the character information, and may be a character display or the like. In addition, the execution mode of each common effect 94 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and any common effect 94 can be distinguished as long as it is different in size and character color. Further, although the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are displayed in substantially the same size, one may be displayed larger than the other. Further, two or more common effects 94 may be executable.
In this case, a plurality of common effects 94 may not be simultaneously executed, or a plurality of common effects 94 may be simultaneously executable.

Further, it is possible to set the expectation level of the whole effect by combining the basic effect and the specific effect 93 without setting the expectation level in the common effect 94 itself. For example, FIGS. 118(b) to (e)
11(b), (c), (d), and (e) are shown in this order to indicate that the degree of expectation is high.
8(g) to (j) may indicate that the degree of expectation is high in the order of (j), (i), (h), and (g). Further, as the target of the combination for determining the degree of expectation, it is possible to include the type of the identification information which is the reach, the notice effect executed in advance, the look-ahead effect and the like. That is, the common effect 94 may indicate the degree of expectation by a combination with another effect different from the common effect 94.

Further, the expectation of the common effect 94 may be added to the expectation of the basic effect. For example, in the common effect 94 with the character information of “expectation degree UP” shown in FIG. 118, the expectation degree is +5% due to the effect of displaying only the character information, and the expectation degree is +1 due to the effect of being surrounded by the solid line.
The expectation may be added by 0%, and the expected degree may be added by +15% depending on the effect displayed by shading. Furthermore, the additional value of each common effect 94 may be further increased by +5% by being executed simultaneously with the specific effect 93. In this case, if the expectation of the basic effect of FIG. 118(a) is 50%, the expectation of FIG. 118(b) is 55%, the expectation of FIG. 118(c) is 60%, and the expectation of FIG. 118(d). The expected degree of 6 is 65%, and the expected degree of FIG. 118(e) is 60%, which is the expected degree of FIG. 118(c), plus 5%, which is 65%. Further, two or more common effects 94 may be executable, and the degree of expectation is added only for the executed common effects 94.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is the special result, the gaming machine that produces the advantageous state for the player controls the effect of the game. Means (effect control device 300), the effect control means can be executed in combination with a plurality of types of basic effects that are set so that the degree of expectation that the game result will be a special result is different. Yes, it is possible to execute a common effect that can be commonly executed for each of a plurality of types of basic effects, and the common effect can be displayed in the same effect mode in each of a plurality of types of basic effects. The degree of expectation in the common effect differs depending on the type of the basic effect displayed as. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means can execute a plurality of types of basic effects and a plurality of types of basic effects, and a common effect 94 that can be commonly executed for each of the plurality of types of basic effects. That is, the common effect is not executed during the period in which the specific effect 93 is executed in the basic effect. Therefore, the contents of the effect can be easily grasped, the effective effect can be executed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Moreover, the display device 41 is provided which is capable of displaying the game effect under the control of the effect control means, and the effect control means displays the character information as the specific effect 93 executed in the basic effect.
The effect of displaying the character information on the display device 41 is executed as the common effect 94. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the character information from being displayed redundantly, it becomes easy to grasp the contents of the effect, and it is possible to execute an effective effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the effect control means is configured to execute the effect such that the area for displaying the specific effect 93 on the display device 41 and the area for executing the common effect 94 overlap each other. Therefore, the contents of the effect can be easily grasped, the effective effect can be executed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time. However, while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game is executed. You may make it wait for execution of. In this case, one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be preferentially executed, or the special figure variable display game may be sequentially executed in the order in which the starting memory is generated. Further, only one kind of special figure variation display game may be executed instead of two kinds.

Further, although it is assumed that the high probability state is brought by the passage of the game ball to the probability variation operation area 38h, it may be determined whether or not the high probability state is obtained based on the big hit symbol. If you do this,
It is not necessary to provide a round that opens for a long time in order to allow the game ball to pass to the probability variation operation area 38h, and all rounds can have the same openable time as a small hit.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification has different ending conditions for the specific game state.

FIG. 119 shows a state transition diagram in this modification. In the gaming machine of this modification, the ending conditions of the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 are to win the falling lottery. The falling lottery is performed at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3. The special figure variation display game is set to the normal gaming state ST1.

In the gaming machine of this modification, the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 46 and the special figure 2 shown in FIG.
The high-probability fluctuation number update processing (steps Y257 and Y268) in the fluctuation start processing is not performed. Further, at the beginning of the special figure 1 variation start processing shown in FIG. 46 and the special figure 2 variation start processing shown in FIG. 47, the falling lottery processing shown in FIG. 120 is performed.

[Falling lottery processing]
FIG. 120 shows the falling lottery process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. The same reference numerals are given to the same processing as the high-probability fluctuation number updating processing shown in FIG. 61. In this falling lottery processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability (step Y
581), if the probability is not high (step Y581; N), the falling lottery process is ended.
When the probability is high (step Y581; Y), the falling lottery random number is acquired (step Y591), and it is determined whether or not the falling lottery is won by referring to the determination value (step Y592).
..

When the falling lottery has not been won (step Y592; N), the falling lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. In addition, when winning the falling lottery (step Y59
2; Y) performs a process of ending the high probability state after step Y584.

In this way, in the case where the ending condition of the specific game state is to win the falling lottery, FIG. 114
By performing the effect during the special game state as shown in FIG. 115, it is guaranteed that the first specific game state ST2 continues without ending during the period when the time value remains in the acquisition time display 92. You can look like you are. As a result, it is possible to make a game machine with a fall lottery appear to have a period in which it does not fall, and it is possible to provide a novel game that has never been seen before.

From the above, the control means (game control device 100) can set a high probability state with a higher probability than the normal probability state as the probability state that the result of the game is a special result (game control device). 100), and in the high-probability state, a falling lottery means for performing a falling lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the normal probability state each time the game is executed (game control device 100).
) And, it is possible to convert the special variation winning device to the open state for a predetermined opening time for each of a plurality of rounds in the special game state, and the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, and the notification condition is satisfied. It will be possible to inform the scheduled opening time later. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the period during which the normal probability state is not entered, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, you may make it equip the 1st start winning a prize mouth 36 with a normal variation winning device. This normal variation winning device is provided with a pair of movable members which can be converted into a state in which the game balls can be easily flowed in by opening in an inverted "C" shape, and the pair of movable members are normally arranged at intervals of about the diameter of the game balls. The closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) is maintained, and the first start winning opening 36 can be won through an interval about the diameter of the game ball. Then, when the result of the ordinary figure variation display game different from the special figure variation display game is the predetermined stop display mode, the ordinary electricity solenoid serving as the drive device opens the inverted "C" shape. It is possible to change the game ball into an open state (an advantageous state for the player) in which the game balls easily flow into the normally variable winning device. That is, the normal variation winning device can be converted into a closed state and an open state in which the game balls can be won more easily than the closed state. The game control device 100 controls the normal variation winning device and the normal variation display game.

There are two states in the operation of the ordinary variable winning device and the execution mode of the universal figure variation display game, that is, the state with the universal communication support and the state without the universal communication support. The state with normal power support is a state in which the number of winnings to the first start winning port 36 per unit time is controlled to be larger than that in the state without normal power support. The control for increasing the number of winnings to the first start winning hole 36 per unit time is to display the figure change time which is the change time of the figure change display game and the result mode of the figure change display game. It is possible to shorten the time to stop the universal figure, which is the time, and to increase the probability of winning the universal figure variation display game. Further, it is possible to increase the number of times of opening when the result of the universal figure variation display game is a win and open the regular variation winning device, and to increase the opening time.

FIG. 121 shows the transition of the game state when the normal variation winning device is provided in the first starting winning opening 36. The transition of the game state shown in FIG. 119 is basically the same, but the normal game state S
In T1, the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, there is no universal power support. Further, in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game to become the special game state, and in the special game state, in the probability variation operation area 38h of the first special variation winning device 38. Gaming ball flows in and probability change operating area switch 38d
When it is detected in (with V passage), it moves to the third specific game state ST4.

The third specific game state ST4 is a state in which the winning probability is a high probability state and a time saving state (with time saving) in which the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shortened as compared with the normal gaming state ST1. The variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is not shortened. The production mode that defines the production mode is the support mode. Further, since the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. It should be noted that the position of the first start winning opening 36 may be set so that it can be aimed even when the player is right-handed, and may be right-handed in the third specific game state ST4.

This third specific game state ST4 has a higher probability of producing a special result than the normal game state ST1, and the first starting memory is likely to occur, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is also shortened. The result is likely to occur, which is an advantageous state for the player. Also,
Since it is easy to win the first start winning hole 36, a lot of prize balls are paid out, which is also advantageous for the player. However, the number of balls to be held is not so large that the number of balls to be held is gradually reduced, though not so much as in the normal gaming state ST1.

In the third specific gaming state ST4, if the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the falling lottery, the first specific gaming state ST2 is entered. With this shift, the normal electric power support is not performed, and the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is shortened as compared with the normal game state ST1. The variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game may or may not be shortened.

The predetermined number of times that is the condition for shifting to the first specific gaming state ST2 may be selected based on the type of special result that triggered the shift to the third specific gaming state ST4, or may be selected as the type of special result. Regardless of the number of times, it may be a fixed number. For example, if the result of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result corresponding to an even number, 50 times, and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is an odd number of grids other than 7. 30 times if the special result is, and 1 if the special result corresponds to the 7th pattern as the result mode of the decorative special map variable display game.
It may be set to 0 times.

In addition, if the particular symbol is a special result corresponding to the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game, the number of times is set to 0 and the first specific game state ST2 is entered without passing through the third specific game state ST4. May be. Further, when the special symbol corresponds to the special result as the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game, it may not be shifted to the first specific game state ST2.
Further, the predetermined number of times may be decided by lottery at the end of the special game state without depending on the special result.

It is advantageous for the player to continue the high probability state without winning the falling lottery. Also,
Even in the high probability state, the number of balls held tends to gradually decrease in the third specific game state ST4 as described above, so it is better to shift to the first specified game state ST2 in which the number of held balls can be expected to increase. It is advantageous for the player, and it is advantageous for the player that the transition is faster. That is,
By executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times, it is possible to shift to a more advantageous state for the player, and due to this difference in the predetermined number of times, the degree of advantage after the end of the special game state is made different. There is.

In the conventional gaming machine, after the special game state ends, the state is only equivalent to the third specific game state ST4, so that the next special result does not occur for a long time despite the high probability state. In a certain so-called fit state, the number of balls held only continues to decrease, and since the monotonous game continues, the interest in the game has declined. However, as described above, by performing the third specific game state ST4 for a certain period of time and then shifting to the first specific game state ST2, the number of balls held increases when reaching the first specific game state ST2. This means that the more the game is fitted in the opposite manner, the more advantageous it is to the player, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game even in the fitted state.

Further, by shifting to the first specific game state ST2, it is possible to give the player a privilege for maintaining a high probability state for a long time without falling, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, the shift to the first specific game state ST2 provides relief for the fit state, and can give the player the desire to continue the game. Then, in the first specific game state ST2, it is possible to provide an unprecedented game property of expecting that a special result is not derived in order to increase the number of balls held.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the game balls of the upper plate 21 are reduced or eliminated due to the long-lasting game equivalent to the third specific game state ST4, and it is clear that the number of balls held is visually reduced. Therefore, the interest of the game is reduced. Further, when the game balls on the upper plate 21 are reduced or lost, the game balls acquired in the special game state are first discharged to the upper plate 21 even if the special result is derived, and thus the payout to the lower plate 23. There was little, and it gave the impression that there were few game balls that were won in the special game state. However, by making it possible to shift to the first specific game state ST2 as described above, it is possible to return the number of balls of the upper plate 21 to the same state as at the end of the special game state, and to give a visual satisfaction. Further, since the special game state is started, the lower plate 23 is paid out, and it is possible to give an impression that the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is large.

Further, by passing through the third specific game state ST4, if the special result is derived during this period, the privilege in the first specific game state ST2 will not be granted, so that the player is It is possible to make the balance of the profit between the player and the game store proper without any advantage.

In addition, after showing that there are three values 10, 30, and 50 that can be selected as the predetermined number of times, it is difficult to grasp the predetermined number of times of shifting to the first specific game state ST2 from the result of the decorative special figure variation display game. Then, in the third specific game state ST4, the number of games played may be notified. By doing so, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not to shift to the first specific game state ST2 when the number of executed games reaches 10 or 30, and to improve the interest of the game. Further, if the number of executed games reaches 50, the first specific game state ST2
Since it is shown to shift to, you can play the game with confidence. Of course, the number of games remaining until the predetermined number of times is reached in the third specific game state ST4 is notified, and the first specific game state S
The transition to T2 may be shown in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can generate the second starting memory for the special figure 2 variable display game as well as the special figure 1 variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, with respect to the second starting memory, a pre-reading effect in which a preliminary determination of a result or the like is performed before the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory, and a suggestion or a notification based on the preliminary determination result is given. I am able to do that.

FIG. 122 shows an example of the look-ahead effect. In this example, as shown in FIG.
In the specific game state ST2, in the state where the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, the second starting memory which is a 12R certainty variation big hit occurs, and along with this, the prefetching effect is started. 122 (
When the prefetching effect is started as shown in b), the game state display 81 displays "time stock mode". Further, the display color of the operation promotion display 87 is changed to prompt the operation of the effect button 25, and the explanation display of "Press the button to stock!"

When the player operates the effect button 25, the value of the acquisition time display 92 increases as shown in FIGS. 122(c) and 122(d). Since there is a second starting memory that is a 12R probability variable big hit here,
As shown in FIG. 22(e), the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 19.89 seconds, and the stock is completed, and as shown in FIG. 122(f), the stock is released. After that, the special result is derived as shown in FIG. 122(g), and the first round which is a specific round is started as shown in FIG. 122(h). During this specific round, the stock release is on standby, and the same effect as shown in FIG. 115 is performed with the start of the second round.

In this way, by making it possible to inform the openable time as a look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest that a special result will be derived, the type of special result and the openable time at the same time. You can direct. It should be noted that such prefetch effect is not limited to being executed during the special figure variation display game, and can be executed even during the special game state. If it is performed during the special game state, the time value notified in the acquisition time display 92 as the openable time in the special game state can be released in the special game state based on the small hit or the big hit to be executed later. You may make it notify by adding time.

In order to perform such prefetching effect, in the special figure starting port 2 switch process shown in FIG. 40, the special figure 2 holding number is set to the upper limit number (for example, 4 as in the special figure starting port 1 switch process shown in FIG. 38). ) To remember. In addition, regarding the special figure reservation information decision processing which is shown in Figure 39, while making the decision even in the 1st specific game state ST2 and the big hit, also it decides the result regarding special figure 2 starting memory, pre-reading to production control device 300. Try to send information.

From the above, a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that are the right to execute the game based on the detection of the game balls in the start winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37). (Gaming control device 100) and a pre-judgment means (gaming control device 100) for judging the starting memory before the game corresponding to the starting memory stored in the starting memory means is executed. When the pre-determination means determines that there is a starting memory that gives a special result, the (game control device 100) responds to the open state of the special variation winning device in the special game state executed corresponding to the special result. The opening time can be reported. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification is different in the operation mode of the first special variation winning device 38.

In FIG. 123, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in this modified example.
The opening mode of The lower long opening shown in FIG. 123(a) is the same as that in FIG. 7(a).
The upper V opening shown in FIG. 123(b) is different from FIG. 7(b) in that the first special variation winning device 38 is continuously opened without being closed in the middle of the round. The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid state of the probability variation operating area switch 38d are the same as those in FIG. 7B. The upper short opening shown in FIG. 123(c) is different from FIG. 7(c) in that the opening mode of the first special variation winning device 38 is the same as the upper V opening shown in FIG. 123(b). The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid state of the probability variation operating area switch 38d are the same as those in FIG. 7C.

That is, the opening mode of the first special variation winning device 38 is the same for both the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, and can be set regardless of the type of the special result. On the other hand, the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid state of the probability variation operation area switch 38d are determined based on whether the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit, and are determined based on the type of special result. .. Regarding the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid state of the probability variation operation area switch 38d, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 123(b) is set in the case of probability variation big hit, and the first operation mode is set in the case of normal big hit rather than the first operation mode. The second operation mode shown in FIG. 123(c) in which it is difficult to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h is set.

In the operation mode shown in FIG. 7, since the opening period of the first special variable winning device 38 is short and only a few game balls can be won in the upper short opening, in the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit of the same round number, the round of the above short opening The number of prize balls that can usually be obtained by the big hit was reduced by that much. However, as shown in FIG. 123, compared to the case shown in FIG. 7, it is possible to obtain the same number of prize balls as in the other rounds even when the upper short is open, and the awards that can be obtained with the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot. The number of balls can be the same.

It should be noted that both the opening manner of the first special variation winning device 38 in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 123(b) and the opening manner of the first special variation winning device 38 in the upper short opening shown in FIG. 123(c) are both performed. Although the continuous opening is performed as the same opening mode, the closing may be sandwiched in the middle as in the opening mode in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 7B in the cases of FIGS. 123B and 123C. In addition, in the case of FIGS. 123B and 123C, the first special variation winning device 38
Although the opening modes of are the same, they may be different. In the case of FIG. 123(c), it may be an open mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be won, and the predetermined number may be smaller than a specified number which is a condition for ending the round. Alternatively, the upper short-circuit opening shown in FIG. 7C may be selected, and the opening mode may be selected according to the type of the special result.

Regarding the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid state of the probability variation operating area switch 38d, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 123(b) in the case of probability variation big hit, and FIG.
The second operation mode shown in FIG. 23(c) is the same as the first operation mode of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid state of the probability variation operation region switch 38d (t31 to t33 and t51 to t5).
3), they may be different. In the case of a normal big hit, an operation mode in which it is more difficult to flow into the probability variation operation region 38h than in an operation mode set in the probability variation big hit is set, and the operation mode and the like can be arbitrarily set.

Further, in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 123(b), the waiting period (t32 to t36) from the end of the operation of the first lever solenoid 38f (t32) to the start of the second operation of the lever solenoid 38f (t36) is fixed. Although it is referred to as time, this time can be set arbitrarily. However, the specified time (for example, 30 seconds after opening) that is a condition for closing the first special variation winning device 38.
It is preferable to set a predetermined time (for example, 5 to 10 seconds) shorter than the above.

Further, this waiting period may be set under conditions other than time. For example, after the operation of the first lever solenoid 38f is completed (t32), the waiting period is ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have won the first special variation winning device 38, and the second lever solenoid 3
The operation of 8f may be started. In this case, the predetermined number is a value smaller than a prescribed number (for example, 10) which is a condition for closing the first special variation winning device 38, and is preferably half or less (for example, 5). This predetermined number is close to the specified number (for example, 8
If the number is 9 or 9), the possibility of flowing into the probability variation operating region 38h becomes extremely low, and the possibility of not being able to shift to the high probability state despite the probability variation big hit increases. Of course, the predetermined number may be a value close to the prescribed number (for example, 8 or 9), and in this case, the game of whether or not the high probability state can be achieved can be performed by the last several winning balls. It should be noted that both the time and the number of winnings may be set as the conditions for ending the waiting period, and the waiting period may be ended when either one of them is achieved.

From the above, the special variation prize device is provided with the inflow regulation member (lever member 38i) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific area and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific region, and the special variation prize. An operation mode control unit (game control device 100) for controlling the opening/closing mode of the device and the operation mode of the inflow restriction member is provided, and the operation mode control unit is a specific round among a plurality of rounds for opening the special variation winning device. In the game ball is allowed to flow into a specific area in, the operation mode of the inflow restriction member in the specific round, depending on the type of the special result, the first operation mode, and to the specific area than the first operation mode The second operation mode in which the inflow of is difficult, and the opening/closing mode of the special variation winning device in the particular round are controlled by
It is possible to control in the same opening/closing mode regardless of the type of special result.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 Amusement machine 36 1st starting prize hole (starting prize area)
37 2nd starting prize hole (starting prize area)
38 1st special variable prize device (special variable prize device)
39 Second special variable prize device (special variable prize device)
100 game control device (control means, start storage means, pre-determination means)

Claims (3)

A game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Control means for controlling the game,
And a special variation winning device capable of converting the closed state where the game ball cannot win to the open state where the game ball can win,
The control means is
It is possible to convert the special variation winning device to the open state according to a predetermined opening time for each of a plurality of rounds in the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of reporting an opening time corresponding to an opening state of the special variation winning device which is scheduled after the notification condition is satisfied in response to the satisfaction of a predetermined notification condition. The notification condition is that it becomes a specific round in the special game state,
The control means is
The total time value of the opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in each round after the specific round is notified in response to the notification condition being satisfied. Gaming machine described in. Starting storage means for storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories that are the right to execute the game based on the detection of a game ball in the starting winning area,
A pre-judgment means for judging the starting memory before the game corresponding to the starting memory stored in the starting memory means is executed,
The control means is
When it is determined by the pre-determination means that there is the starting memory that is the special result,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in the special game state executed corresponding to the special result can be notified.

Images